WO1999003976A2 - Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof - Google Patents

Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1999003976A2
WO1999003976A2 PCT/US1998/015067 US9815067W WO9903976A2 WO 1999003976 A2 WO1999003976 A2 WO 1999003976A2 US 9815067 W US9815067 W US 9815067W WO 9903976 A2 WO9903976 A2 WO 9903976A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
population
cells
leukocytes
leukocyte
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1998/015067
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1999003976A3 (en
Inventor
William M. Greenman
Joshua A. Grass
Sohel Talib
Adonis Stassinopoulos
Derek J. Hei
John E. Hearst
Original Assignee
Cerus Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cerus Corporation filed Critical Cerus Corporation
Priority to AU85776/98A priority Critical patent/AU748074B2/en
Priority to CA002296366A priority patent/CA2296366A1/en
Priority to JP2000503182A priority patent/JP2003520563A/en
Priority to EP98936943A priority patent/EP1005531A2/en
Publication of WO1999003976A2 publication Critical patent/WO1999003976A2/en
Publication of WO1999003976A3 publication Critical patent/WO1999003976A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/06Animal cells or tissues; Human cells or tissues
    • C12N5/0602Vertebrate cells
    • C12N5/0634Cells from the blood or the immune system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/28Bone marrow; Haematopoietic stem cells; Mesenchymal stem cells of any origin, e.g. adipose-derived stem cells
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/46Cellular immunotherapy
    • A61K39/461Cellular immunotherapy characterised by the cell type used
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/46Cellular immunotherapy
    • A61K39/462Cellular immunotherapy characterized by the effect or the function of the cells
    • A61K39/4621Cellular immunotherapy characterized by the effect or the function of the cells immunosuppressive or immunotolerising
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/46Cellular immunotherapy
    • A61K39/464Cellular immunotherapy characterised by the antigen targeted or presented
    • A61K39/4643Vertebrate antigens
    • A61K39/46434Antigens related to induction of tolerance to non-self
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/46Cellular immunotherapy
    • A61K39/464Cellular immunotherapy characterised by the antigen targeted or presented
    • A61K39/4643Vertebrate antigens
    • A61K39/4644Cancer antigens
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2239/00Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46
    • A61K2239/31Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46 characterized by the route of administration
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2239/00Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46
    • A61K2239/38Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46 characterised by the dose, timing or administration schedule
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2239/00Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46
    • A61K2239/46Indexing codes associated with cellular immunotherapy of group A61K39/46 characterised by the cancer treated
    • A61K2239/48Blood cells, e.g. leukemia or lymphoma
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2501/00Active agents used in cell culture processes, e.g. differentation
    • C12N2501/06Anti-neoplasic drugs, anti-retroviral drugs, e.g. azacytidine, cyclophosphamide

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to cell compositions that are incapable of proliferation but retain function, and the methods of preparation and use of such compositions. More specifically, the present invention relates to methods for preparing proliferation inhibited leukocytes for use in transfusion.
  • BMT Bone marrow transplantations
  • Leukemias are malignant neoplasms of hematopoietic tissues. These neoplasms are categorized into two predominant forms: chronic and acute. While acute leukemias are characterized by undifferentiated cell populations (e.g. Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia or "ALL” and Acute Myelogenous Leukemia or "AML”), chronic Leukemias usually present a more mature morphology (e.g., Chronic Myelocytic Leukemia or "CML” and Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia or "CLL”). In the United States in 1995, there were approximately 25,700 new cases of leukemia, of which about 4,500 were CML. In 1996, approximately 7,000 new cases of CML were diagnosed in the U.S.
  • ALL Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia
  • AML Acute Myelogenous Leukemia
  • CML Chronic Myelocytic Leukemia
  • CLL Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia
  • leukemia Society Leukemia Society Web Site, 1997.
  • Allo BMT Allogeneic bone marrow transplantation
  • a leukemia patient is first given a myeloablative dose of chemoradiotherapy. This phase of treatment is designed to eradicate all leukemia cells and their progenitors.
  • the functionally inoperative bone marrow is subsequently replaced with allogeneic disease- free stem cells.
  • this transplanted marrow facilitates the restoration of normal polyclonal hematopoietic proliferation.
  • the improvement in disease control also relies on an immune mediated response of the graft against the leukemia cells, referred to as the graft- versus-leukemia (GVL) effect.
  • VTL graft- versus-leukemia
  • Bone marrow is not the exclusive source of hematopoietic progenitors. Peripheral blood and cord blood may also be used as a source of stem cells. See McCullough, The
  • Trophic factors may be administered systemically to increase the proliferation of peripheral blood stem cells thereby creating alternatives to bone marrow for the harvest of hematopoietic progenitors.
  • Trophic factors such as granulocyte-colony-stimulating factor
  • the major obstacles to successful BMT are Graft- versus-Host
  • GVHD GVHD
  • infections and relapse of the underlying disease GVHD and infections are responsible for 10-30% of morbidity and mortality in the first 100 days following transplantation (Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Daniel P. Stites, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G. Parslow (eds.), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT, 1994). If the BMT fails, a "relapse" can result from the unchecked proliferation of residual tumor cells. See Slavin et al, "Immunotherapy of Minimal Residual Disease by Immunocompetent Lymphocytes and their Activation Cytokines," Cancer Investigation, 10:221 (1992). The medical treatment options in the past have been quite limited in such situations. For example, second bone marrow transplants and/or the extended use of cytotoxic drugs are associated with poor survival.
  • DLIs are particularly effective for the treatment of CML, but are also used for the treatment of AML, ALL and CLL. DLIs have also been used for the treatment of myelodysplasia (MDS), non-Hodgkin's lymphoma,
  • GVL effect Barrett, J. et al, Cur. Op. One. 8:89-95, 1996.
  • the mechanism for the GVL effect is not as well understood. It is effected by
  • T-cells derived from the donor leads to higher incidences of leukemia relapse.
  • An immune response is necessary for the effect to occur which has been experimentally demonstrated by the higher rates of relapse following syngeneic BMTs as compared to allogeneic BMTs (Duell, T., Ann. Int. Med. 126:184-192, 1997).
  • the high homogeneity of the population has resulted in ineffective DLI therapy since the random donors and hosts are not sufficiently allogeneic (Takahashi, K. et al, Lancet. 343:700-702, 1994).
  • the donor T-cells are transfected with a "suicide gene", the herpes virus thymidine kinase (HSV-tk) gene which confers sensitivity to the drug gancyclovir. If GVHD symptoms are observed, the patient is given gancyclovir to eliminate the T-cells in vivo, until the symptoms regress
  • Another "suicide gene” approach utilizes the FAS gene encoding an apoptosis signaling protein (Ariad Pharmaceuticals).
  • a dimerizing agent such as FK1012 is used to induce FAS production which kills the donor cells that express the gene.
  • GVHD GVHD symptoms are used as the signal to begin treatment with the drug. Therefore, GVHD is allowed to start and must be shut down.
  • the drug used to eliminate the T-cells must be given systemically, thereby exposing the entire body to drug for the time necessary to bring GVHD under control.
  • Gancyclovir has toxic side effects and the HSV-tk protein is immunogenic. Additionally, because the patients need to be protected from the severe forms of GVHD, immunosuppressive prophylaxis remains an absolute requirement. Also, in some instances of chronic GVHD, the administration of gancyclovir was proven not to be fully effective (Bonini C. et al. Science 276:1719-1724,
  • the disadvantages include the difficulty in the synthesis and the insolubility of the dimerizing agents that induce FAS production.
  • the binding of the dimerizing agents to FKBP protein in the host may limit the available drug.
  • the currently accepted method for transfusion associated GVHD prevention is ⁇ -radiation treatment (2500 cGy).
  • the clinical dose of ⁇ -irradiation (2500cGy) used for prevention of TA-GVHD results in a 10 5 to 10 6 fold reduction in viable T-cells.
  • ⁇ - and ionizing radiation in general are not specific for nucleic acids. As a result of their high energy, ⁇ -radiation and UVC also attack proteins and other cellular components, causing significant non-specific damage (Deeg, H.J. et al, Blood Cells 18:151-162, 1992).
  • UVB has been used to abolish rat lymphocyte proliferation while preserving BM progenitor cell and primitive hematopoietic stem cell viability for engraftment.
  • CTL activity was reduced but was still present (Gowing, H. et al, Blood 87:1635-1643, 1996).
  • UVB irradiation also leads to significant cell damage, especially if lamps with a broad emission spectrum are used (Gowing, H. et al, Blood 87:1635-1643, 1996; Pamphilon, A. A. et al, Blood 77:2072-2078, 1991).
  • UVB is not selective for nucleic acids only, but modifies any chemical group which absorbs between 280 and 320 nm.
  • UVA irradiation in the presence of the photosensitizer 8-methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), used in the treatment of human leukocytes was shown to inhibit both the stimulating ability and proliferation of peripheral blood leukocytes, in mixed lymphocyte culture reaction in vitro (Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 77:235-239, 1981; Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 76:80-87, 1981).
  • UVA plus psoralen treatment has resulted in the inhibition of surface antigen expression, cytokine synthesis (IL-1, IL-6, IL-8 and TNF) and transcription of cytokine mRNA (Gruner, S. et al, Tiss. Ant. 27:147-154, 1986; Neuner, P. et al, Photochem. Photobiol.
  • the present invention provides an effective method for treating leukocytes from an allogeneic donor to produce leukocytes that are unable to proliferate but maintain viability and immune function effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. Since the treated leukocytes are incapable of proliferation, they are unable to induce GVHD when introduced into an allogeneic host (in a syngeneic or autologous transfusion, GVHD is not an issue) and are therefore ideal for use in DLI for various clinical indications and especially for the treatment of cancer and to provide immune function to an immunocompromised mammal.
  • An isolated cell population comprising a population of leukocytes wherein a portion of the leukocyte population is non-proliferating, such that the cell population is incapable of eliciting graft-versus-host disease (GVHD) in an allogeneic host; and a portion of the leukocyte population retains immunological activity, including the ability to promote destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen.
  • GVHD graft-versus-host disease
  • at least 90% of the leukocytes in the population are non-proliferating.
  • the population of leukocytes of the preceding embodiments is further characterized as 1) preferably comprising T cells, NK cells and antigen presenting cells; 2) capable, upon appropriate stimulation, of synthesizing and/or secreting cytokines such as IL-2, IFN- ⁇ , IL-10 and GM-CSF; 3) capable of expressing surface markers characteristic of T-cell activation and immune function, such as CD4, CD 8, CD 16 and CD56, among others; and 4) exhibiting an increased ratio of killer function to proliferative function, compared to untreated leukocyte populations.
  • the leukocyte population of the invention is, on the whole, incapable of proliferation but retains immunological activity. This leukocyte population will be capable of the following activities, among others: 1. Promoting destruction of a diseased cell, an infected cell, or a pathogen.
  • the second population of cells can be a suspension of cells or an organized collection of cells, such as a patch of tissue or an organ.
  • Such cells can include, for instance, hematopoietic cells, myeloid cells, leukocytes, bone marrow cells, islet cells, hepatic cells, neuronal cells, myocardial cells, mesenchymal cells and endothelial cells.
  • the population of leukocytes is effective to promote destruction of a cancerous cell.
  • the cancerous cell is selected from the group consisting of Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell, Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML) cell, Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL) cell, Acute Myelogenous
  • the cancerous cell is a Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell or a multiple myeloma cell.
  • the population of leukocytes is effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell which is an infected cell. Infected cells include cells infected with a virus.
  • the virus infecting the cell is selected from the group consisting of cytomegalo virus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad) and Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus.
  • CMV cytomegalo virus
  • EBV Epstein Barr virus
  • Ad Adenovirus
  • Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus a virus infecting the cell.
  • the leukocyte population is effective to promote destruction of a pathogen.
  • Pathogens include bacteria, fungi and parasites.
  • the leukocyte population is effective to facilitate engraftment by a second population of cells.
  • the cells used for engraftment can be, for example, hematopoietic cells, myeloid cells, leukocytes, bone marrow cells, islet cells, hepatic cells, neuronal cells, myocardial cells, mesenchymal cells and endothelial cells.
  • the second population of engrafted cells can comprise a solid organ or portion thereof.
  • Subsets of the leukocyte population described above, selected by various methods, are also provided by the invention.
  • the subsets include lymphocytes and T-lymphocytes; and subsets can be obtained by both positive and negative selection based on, for example, surface marker expression.
  • Preferred surface markers include CD8, CD4, CD 16 and CD56.
  • Methods for selection of subsets of leukocyte populations from whole blood include leukophoresis and red cell removal.
  • the invention provides a variety of therapeutic methods utilizing cell populations as described above, including donor leukocyte infusion, leukocyte add-back, immune reconstitution, adoptive immunotherapy, treatment of mixed chimerism, and methods for enhancing engraftment of a second population of transplanted cells.
  • the cell populations of the invention can be introduced into the host prior to, at the same time as, or subsequent to transplantation of the second population of cells.
  • Also provided by the invention is a method for preparing a treated leukocyte population wherein the leukocyte population as a whole is non-proliferating and incapable of eliciting graft-versus-host disease (GVHD) in an allogeneic host, the method comprising the steps of: i) providing a sample comprising a population of leukocytes; and ii) combining the sample with a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, in an amount such that the compound forms about 1 to 10 4 adducts per 10 8 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes, thereby inhibiting proliferation but maintaining immunological activity, including the ability of the leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen.
  • GVHD graft-versus-host disease
  • the compound is present in an amount effective to form from about 5 to 10 3 adducts per 10 8 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes.
  • the method results in proliferation being inhibited in at least 90% of the T cells within the treated leukocyte population.
  • the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid further comprises a nucleic acid binding moiety capable of binding non-covalently with a nucleic acid.
  • the compound comprises: a nucleic acid-binding moiety; a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with nucleic acid; and a frangible linker covalently linking the nucleic acid-binding moiety and the effector moiety.
  • the nucleic acid-binding moiety is an aromatic intercalator and the effector moiety is a mustard.
  • the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid comprises a photoactivatable moiety, which upon electromagnetic stimulation, forms a covalent bond with a nucleic acid.
  • the method will further comprise the step of exposing the sample of leukocytes that have been combined with the compound to light, to photoactivate the photoactivatable moiety, thereby resulting in the photoactivatable moiety forming a covalent bond with leukocyte genomic DNA.
  • the compound having a photoactivatable moiety is selected from the group consisting of furocoumarins, actinomycins, anthracyclinones, anthramycins, benzodipyrones, fluorenes, fluorenones, monostral fats blue, norphillin A, organic dyes; phenanthridines, phenazathionium salts, phenazines, phenothiazines, phenylazides, quinolines and thiaxanthenones acridines and ellipticenes.
  • a preferred furocoumarin is a psoralen.
  • Preferred psoralens include PAP, 8- methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), 4'-aminomethyl 4, 5', 8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT), 5-methoxy psoralen, and trioxalen 4, 5' 8-trimethylpsoralen.
  • the psoralen is preferably present at a concentration in the range of 10 "4 to 150 ⁇ M and the sample of leukocytes is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm, preferably between 320 and 400 nm.
  • the ultraviolet light is provided at a dosage of between 10 " to 100 J/cm .
  • the sample of leukocytes will be exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of 1 second to 60 minutes.
  • the method for preparing a treated leukocyte population employs the psoralen referred to herein as S-59, having the formula:
  • the sample of leukocytes combined with S-59 is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm, preferably between 320 and 400 nm.
  • the sample of leukocytes combined with S-59 is preferably exposed to the ultraviolet light at a dosage of between 10 "3 to 100 J/cm 2 , more preferably, 3 J/cm 2 .
  • the sample of leukocytes is preferably exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of between 1 second to 60 minutes, more preferably, for 1 minute.
  • the sample of leukocytes will preferably be provided at a cell density of 10 to 10 9 cells per mL, more preferably between 10 2 and 10 8 cells pre mL, most preferably at 2 x 10 6 cells per mL.
  • a leukocyte population produced according to the preceding methods is provided, including a leukocyte population specifically treated with S-59.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is a method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, comprising mixing a leukocyte population produced by the aforementioned methods with a population of allogeneic cells containing the diseased cell or pathogen.
  • the method can be performed in vitro or in vivo.
  • the leukocyte population is mixed with the population of allogeneic cells of a mammalian host in vivo by donor leukocyte infusion into said host.
  • the donor leukocyte infusion is administered to a mammalian host suffering from relapse from leukemia or multiple myeloma post BMT.
  • the diseased cell is a cancerous cell.
  • Cancerous cells from the following cancers are encompassed: Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell,
  • CmML Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia
  • CLL Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia
  • AML Acute Myelogenous Leukemia
  • ALL Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
  • MM multiple myeloma
  • Hodgkin's lymphoma cell Hodgkin's lymphoma cell and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cell.
  • the cancerous cell is a Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia cell or a multiple myeloma cell.
  • cancerous cell is a cancerous cell selected from the group consisting of breast cancerous cell, lung cancerous cell, ovarian cancerous cell, testicular cancerous cell, prostate cancerous cell, colon cancerous cell, melanoma cell, renal carcinoma cell, neuroblastoma cell, head tumor cell and neck tumor cell.
  • the diseased cell is an infected cell.
  • Preferred infected cells encompass cells infected with a virus such as cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad) or Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus.
  • the leukocyte population has been stimulated with one or more epitopes of an antigen specific to the diseased cell or pathogen, to expand the number of cytotoxic T cells specific to the antigen.
  • Stimulation or antigen-specific T cell expansion can be performed in vivo, ex vivo, or in vitro. In vivo stimulation is performed by vaccination of the leukocyte donor with an antigen specific to the diseased cell or pathogen prior to isolation of the leukocyte population from the donor.
  • the leukocyte population is preferably stimulated with a bcr-abl antigen of the CML cell.
  • the leukocyte donor can be vaccinated with the idiotype antigen of the patient's myeloma cell.
  • the leukocyte population has been stimulated with a mitogen.
  • Stimulation is preferably conducted in vitro with a mitogenic composition such as a phorbol myristate acetate (PMA) plus ionomycin, or a phytohemagglutinin.
  • PMA phorbol myristate acetate
  • Figure 2 shows 3 H-thymidine incorporation by effector cells treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages, in a MLR assay (see Example 2).
  • Figure 3 shows the level of IL-2 production in a MLR by effector cells photochemically treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages (see Example 2).
  • Figure 4 shows the level of IFN- ⁇ production in a MLR by effector cells photochemically treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages (see Example 2).
  • Figure 5 shows the levels of IL-8 generated after PCT of leukocytes in PC with different concentrations of S-59 and 0.5 J/cm UVA, as a function of time after PCT (see Example 2)
  • Figure 6 shows the levels of CD69 marker expression after PCT with different doses of AMT and 1 J/cm 2 UVA, as a function of time after treatment (see Example 3)
  • Figure 7 shows psoralen-DNA adduct formation following photochemical treatment with various psoralens in PC.
  • S-59 squares
  • AMT triangle
  • 8-MOP circles
  • 1.9 J/cm 2 UVA see Example 3
  • Figure 8 shows the effects of S-59 + UVA treatment on proliferation of treated cells, measured by H thymidine incorporation in a MLR assay.
  • NR denotes untreated cells
  • UV denotes cells irradiated with UVA in the absence of S-59.
  • Figure 9 shows the effects of S-59 + UVA treatment on proliferation of treated cells, measured after activation of treated cells with anti-CD3 antibody. See Example 14 for details.
  • Figure 10A shows production of IL-2 by human PBMC that have been photochemically treated with S-59 + UVA and stimulated in a MLR. Measurements are by sandwich ELISA. See Example 14 for details.
  • Figure 10B shows production of IFN- ⁇ by human PBMC that have been photochemically treated with S-59 + UVA and stimulated in a MLR. Measurements are by sandwich ELISA.
  • Figure 11 A shows CD69 expression in treated and control cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
  • Figure 11B shows CD25 expression in treated and control cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
  • Figure 12 shows CD40L expression in treated and control untreated cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
  • Figure 13 shows cytotoxic T-cell activity of photochemically-treated, activated leukocytes, measured by 51 Cr release from target cells that were co-incubated with the treated leukocytes.
  • E:T represents effector cell to target cell ratio.
  • Figure 14 shows measurements of average body weight in irradiated mice which received a MHC-mismatched bone marrow transplant along with S-59 + UVA-treated splenocytes, and were then challenged with leukemia cells three days after transplant. Splenocytes were exposed to UVA in the presence of 0.01 ⁇ M S-59 for different amounts of time, as indicated in the figure.
  • Figure 15 shows analysis of GVL activity in leukemia-challenged mice, which received bone marrow transplants with or without infusion of treated leukocytes. GVL activity is demonstrated by percent leukemia-free survival (survival ratios given in parentheses).
  • Figure 16 shows analysis of proliferative ability of S-303-treated responder cells, measured by H-thymidine incorporation between 6 and 7 days after co-culture with gamma-inactivated allogeneic stimulator cells in a MLR.
  • Figure 17 shows levels of IFN- ⁇ in MLR supernatants in which the responder cells were treated with different concentrations of S -303 prior to co-culture.
  • BMT bone marrow transplantation
  • DLI donor leukocyte infusion
  • LDA limiting dilution analysis
  • MLR mixed lymphocyte reaction
  • PA photochemically arrested
  • PCT photochemical treatment
  • PI-DLI Photochemically inactivated donor leukocyte infusions
  • PUVA Psoralen and ultraviolet A radiation.
  • PAP 4'- and 5 '-primary amino-substituted psoralen
  • S-59 a primary amino-substituted psoralen having the following formula:
  • PBSC peripheral blood stem cell
  • PC platelet concentrate
  • TA-GVHD transfusion associated graft-versus-host -disease
  • PHA phytohemagglutinin
  • Allogeneic refers to the relationship that exists between genetically nonidentical members of the same species, i.e., the members are not syngeneic.
  • “Host” is used interchangeably with “recipient” and refers to a mammalian recipient of allogeneic donor leukocytes. Generally, the host will be a human but other mammals such as mice, dogs, cats, monkeys, horses, etc. are encompassed.
  • a “leukocyte” refers to any white blood cell including the lineage progenitor cells.
  • Antigen presenting cells include macrophages, and dendritic cells which are present in low numbers in peripheral blood, as well as their respective precursor cells. Leukocytes are present in circulating blood and in bone marrow as well as in the myelopoietic, lymphoid and reticular sites of the reticuloendothelial system.
  • leukocyte population refers to a population of leukocytes that contains more than one leukocyte cell type and will include at least T cells, antigen presenting cells and NK cells.
  • Donor leukocytes refer to leukocytes that are not endogenous to the host animal but are derived from an allogeneic donor.
  • the leukocyte population and donor leukocytes can be from a mammal including rodents, rabbits, dogs, etc.
  • purified is meant that the leukocyte population has been isolated from the body and processed to be substantially free from non-leukocyte cell types and preferably from other contaminants such as cellular debris that are present in the source of the leukocytes, the source generally being peripheral blood, bone marrow or even splenocytes.
  • the leukocyte population is purified such that it contains less than 13% red blood cells (RBC), more preferably less than 5% , even more preferably, less than 1%. In a most preferred embodiment, the hematocrit level is less than 0.5%.
  • Treated leukocytes refers to leukocytes that have been exposed to or contacted with a compound capable of forming one or more covalent bonds with nucleic acid.
  • the leukocytes can be "treated” by PCT or with an alkylator compound.
  • Photochemically inactivated or “photochemically arrested” (PA) or “PCT-arrested” leukocytes refers to PCT leukocytes that are incapable of proliferation even upon stimulation, and does not imply that the leukocytes are inactivated in protein expression and immune function.
  • a population of leukocytes of the invention contains but is not limited to cells that are "non-proliferating". Cells are "non-proliferating” if they are arrested in DNA replication and are thus, unable to divide to generate new cells even upon stimulation with reagents such as mitogens, cytokines, antigens, antibodies or other proliferation stimuli. It is not essential that the methods of the present invention result in replication arrest of every leukocyte in the preparation. For the purpose of this invention, it is adequate that the leukocyte population is arrested in proliferation in at least 90%, more preferably in at least 95%) of the leukocytes within the purified population, provided that the small fraction of leukocytes capable of proliferation is insufficient to cause GVHD in an allogeneic host.
  • 99% or more of the leukocytes within the population are non-proliferating.
  • Proliferation activity can be assayed, e.g., by limiting dilution assay (LDA), or by H-thymidine incorporation separately, or as part of a MLR assay as described in the Examples below.
  • LDA limiting dilution assay
  • T-cells in the population are proliferation inhibited to the limit of detection by LDA. The results of these assays have been shown to be predictive of the ability of the treated leukocytes to proliferate in vivo.
  • GVHD vascular endothelial growth factor-induced hypertension
  • the occurrence of GVHD is attributed to minor histocompatibility antigens.
  • the donor T-cells are able to proliferate unchallenged in that environment and attack host tissues, causing the pathological symptoms.
  • antigen-presenting-cells of the host interact with the T-cells of the donor in the context of the major histocompatibility complexes (MHC) I and II and induce their activation against cells bearing host-specific (minor) antigens. This leads to clonal proliferation of the activated
  • T-cells which attack the host tissues and release cytokines.
  • Cytokines secreted by the T-cells also activate a variety of other effector cells of the host which adds to the tissue damage through the additional generation of cytokines (cytokine storm).
  • cytokine storm e.g., Burakoff, S.J. et al, Graft- Versus-Host Disease Immunology, Pathophysiology, and Treatment, in Brinkhous KMS, S.A. (ed): Hematology, vol. 12 (ed 1st). New York, Marcell Dekker, Inc., 1990, p 725. Burakoff, S.J.
  • GVHD When GVHD is diagnosed, the patient is usually given a high dose of immunosuppressive drugs to suppress the GVHD.
  • immunosuppressive drugs also render the graft leukocytes ineffective in GVL and the patient may relapse into leukemia.
  • GVHD The capability of a leukocyte population to elicit GVHD can be determined in vivo, e.g., as described in Example 4 below, or in vitro by limiting dilution assay (LDA), or by
  • the leukocyte population is judged incapable of eliciting GVHD if the number of clonable T cells in the population, as assayed by LDA, is within about 10 "3 to 10 "4 of that present in the untreated leukocyte control population (positive control for GVHD and proliferation).
  • lack of clinical symptoms of GVHD (symptoms described in Example 4) in an allogeneic recipient of the leukocyte population indicates incapability of the population to elicit GVHD
  • a leukocyte population is considered "effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen" if it includes leukocytes that are able to participate, directly or indirectly, in immune responses that are effective to kill or clear the targeted diseased cell or pathogen from the body, or to limit the proliferation of the diseased cell or pathogen.
  • the diseased cell or pathogen can be destroyed via any mechanism. It is not the intention of the invention to have the methods of treating leukocytes be limited by particular mechanisms by which the treated leukocytes can mediate destruction.
  • the diseased cell may be destroyed by cytolysis by T or NK cells, but can also be killed by other mechanisms such as by being induced to undergo apoptosis.
  • the diseased cell or pathogen can also be destroyed by antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC), by phagocytosis by macrophages, or be cleared by the reticuloendothelial system via any immune mechanism naturally existing in a mammal.
  • ADCC antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity
  • a pathogen that resides inside a host cell can be destroyed indirectly by killing the host cell upon which it depends for its survival.
  • the "effective" treated donor leukocyte can be an effector cell such as a cytotoxic T cell (CTL), a NK cell, or a macrophage that directly kills a target diseased cell or pathogen, or that induces the diseased cell to undergo apoptosis.
  • CTL cytotoxic T cell
  • NK cell a NK cell
  • macrophage that directly kills a target diseased cell or pathogen, or that induces the diseased cell to undergo apoptosis.
  • the treated donor leukocyte can mediate destruction by stimulating other leukocytes, e.g., the leukocytes from a transplanted bone marrow, a previous DLI, or the host's own leukocytes, to perform the killing or clearance.
  • Stimulation of other leukocytes can be by surface antigen expression, cytokine secretion or any appropriate mechanism. Cytolysis can occur via MHC -restricted and/or non-MHC restricted (such as by NK cells) mechanisms.
  • the effectiveness of a leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen can be measured by various assays, such as by MLR or by 51 Cr release assay as described below in the Examples. Cytolytic effectiveness is demonstrated, e.g., by the ability to mediate killing of a leukemic cell in a 51 Cr release assay.
  • a leukocyte population is considered effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell if, in an appropriate assay (e.g., the 51 Cr release assay), the population exhibits cytolytic activity at a level of at least about 20% above that of the negative control population.
  • an appropriate assay e.g., the 51 Cr release assay
  • the types of diseased cells and pathogens targeted for killing are provided below.
  • Cell viability is defined herein as survival in circulation i.e., in the blood stream and other tissues.
  • the leukocyte population includes leukocytes able to secrete at least interleukin-2 (IL-2) and interferon- ⁇ (IFN- ⁇ ) under stimulation.
  • IL-2 interleukin-2
  • IFN- ⁇ interferon- ⁇
  • cytokines are relevant because of their established role in T-cell activation and GVHD/GVL.
  • Other relevant cytokines include granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor (GM-CSF) and interleukin- 10 (IL-10). Secretion of cytokines can be readily assayed e.g., by using cytokine assay kits (e.g. kits from R&D Systems) as described in the Examples section below.
  • the surface antigens (also referred to as surface markers) expressed on the leukocytes in the purified leukocyte population will depend on the specific cell type.
  • the population will include leukocytes expressing the following surface antigens which are known to be involved in interactions associated with T-cell and NK cell activation and immune function: CD2, CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD18, CD25, CD69 (lymphocyte activation marker) and CD16/CD56, antigens.
  • the leukocytes will also express other surface markers including MHC Class I and Class II,
  • CD8 CD4, CD3/TcR (T cell receptor), adhesion molecules such as CD54 (ICAM -1), LFA-1 and VLA-4, and other co-stimulatory molecules.
  • the expression of surface antigen can be detected and measured by various assays such as by staining cells with antibodies specific to the particular antigen and detecting the antibodies which have been labeled directly or indirectly, by standard FACS-SCAN analysis. Other methods known in the art include immunoprecipitation of surface antigens and immunoblotting.
  • Diseased cell refers to a cancerous cell, an infected cell, or a cell in any type of pathological state, which may be present in vivo or in vitro.
  • the cancerous or malignant cell can be from any type of cancer, of any tissue or cell type origin.
  • Such malignant or cancerous cells include but are not limited to cells of the following malignancies: Leukemia including Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML), Chronic Lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), Acute Myelogenous Leukemia (AML), and Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL); Multiple myeloma (MM); Non-Hodgkin lymphoma and Hodgkin's disease (lymphoma); solid tumors, including breast, lung, ovarian and testicular cancers, prostate cancer, colon cancer, melanoma, renal carcinoma cell, neuroblastoma, and head and neck tumors.
  • Infected cell encompasses cells infected by any of the following: a virus, a bacterium, a fungus, a parasite or any other pathogenic microorganism.
  • Pathogen is defined as any agent containing nucleic acid and capable of causing disease in a human, other mammals, or vertebrates.
  • pathogens are bacteria, viruses, protozoa, fungi, yeasts, molds, and mycoplasmas which cause disease in humans, other mammals, or vertebrates.
  • the genetic material of the pathogen may be DNA or RNA, and the genetic material may be present as single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the pathogen can be outside a cell or residing inside a cell as exemplified by HIV in a macrophage.
  • Light dose or dosage or “PCT dose”, as measured in units of J/cm 2 refers to the total light energy per unit area that a sample of leukocytes receives during PCT. Light dosage can be altered by varying the intensity of light and time of exposure of the cell sample to the light.
  • Intensity of light as measured in units of mW/cm 2 refers to the energy of light received per unit of the sample, per second.
  • a “photoactivatable moiety” is defined herein as a moiety which undergoes a chemical change in response to electromagnetic radiation.
  • the photoactivated moiety forms a covalent bond with a nucleic acid to form a compound: nucleic acid complex, referred to herein as an "adduct".
  • Aromatic intercalator refers to a compound or region thereof having aromatic ring structure, that can intercalate nucleic acids.
  • Aromatic intercalators include but are not limited to, anthracene, acridine, napthalene, napthoic acid, etc.
  • An "isolated population of cells,” as used herein, comprises a population of cells existing outside of the organism in which the cells normally reside.
  • Immunological activity refers to functions expressed by cells of the immune system, such as T-cells, B-cells, NK cells, antigen-presenting cells (APCs) and others, such functions including, but not limited to, synthesis and secretion of cytokines, cell-mediated cytotoxicity, synthesis and secretion of antibodies, processing and presentation of antigens and antigen fragments, and expression of surface markers characteristic of immune cells.
  • T-cells T-cells, B-cells, NK cells, antigen-presenting cells (APCs) and others, such functions including, but not limited to, synthesis and secretion of cytokines, cell-mediated cytotoxicity, synthesis and secretion of antibodies, processing and presentation of antigens and antigen fragments, and expression of surface markers characteristic of immune cells.
  • APCs antigen-presenting cells
  • the present invention provides a method of treating a population of isolated leukocytes so as to render a portion of the population non-proliferating to the extent that the population causes minimal GVHD while still retaining sufficient immune function effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen.
  • minimal GVHD is meant that the extent of the GVHD is insufficient to result in mortality of the mammal or to abolish the ability of the leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen and/or to mediate GVL effect.
  • GVHD is clearly associated with the clonal expansion of the donor T-cells and, in principle, any treatment which removes, inactivates or kills leukocytes would be effective against it.
  • GVL is associated with an immune response of the donor leukocytes and may be the result of cytolytic action, presentation of antigens, synthesis of specific cytokines or a combination of the above. This necessitates some of the functions of the donor leukocytes to be intact for a GVL effect to be observed.
  • the inactivation of donor leukocyte function in efforts to avoid GVHD also renders the donor BM or leukocytes ineffective in providing necessary immune functions to an immunocompromised or BMT host.
  • the proliferating ability of leukocytes must be selectively removed, while retaining some level of leukocyte function.
  • the invention provides populations of leukocytes with these characteristics.
  • the isolated population of leukocytes of the present invention provide various advantages over those previously described and used.
  • One significant benefit is that eliminating the onset of GVHD will allow the safe infusion of donor leukocytes into patients.
  • the host who is lacking an immune system or has a chimeric immune system, can receive either a larger dose of treated donor leukocytes and/or multiple DLIs, thus enhancing the efficacy of treatment of the disease.
  • the threat of GVHD limited the number of leukocytes infused.
  • the population of non-proliferating leukocytes is effective to provide the host with sufficient immune defense to combat cancer and infections.
  • leukocytes are useful for treating relapsing hematological malignancies such as chronic myelogenous, acute myelogenous, acute lympholytic, multiple myeloma and other forms of leukemia and myeloma, as part of post-BMT treatment or as an alternative to BMT.
  • a GVL effect from the DLI is useful not only to remove minimal residual disease but can also be applied to the treatment of a higher malignant cell load, especially since absence of leukocyte expansion allows for the safe infusion of greater numbers of cells.
  • the treated leukocyte populations of the invention are also useful for the treatment of certain solid tumors (e.g.
  • the method of treating leukocytes of the invention involves the following.
  • Leukocytes can be obtained from bone marrow, cord blood or whole blood.
  • the most convenient source of leukocytes is peripheral blood. Methods of isolating leukocytes from other sources are described in the scientific literature.
  • Whole blood is processed to purify and enrich for leukocytes by, for example, red cell removal or leukophoresis.
  • the resultant purified population of leukocytes is about 99% free of red blood cells which are of different size and density compared to leukocytes and are readily removed by these processes.
  • the population of leukocytes is then mixed with a compound, and treated under conditions that are effective to arrest proliferation of the leukocytes without compromising cell viability and integrity.
  • compound will refer to a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid. Covalent bond formation may form about from 1 to 10 4 adducts, preferably from 5 to 10 adducts, most preferably 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA. It is important that the treatment conditions minimize nonspecific damage to proteins and other cellular components and avoid membrane damage. Membrane integrity of the majority of treated leukocytes is necessary for a GVL effect to take place. These treatment conditions will also be effective to render the treated leukocytes incapable of eliciting
  • GVHD if introduced into an allogeneic host, or non-responsive in an MLR assay in vitro.
  • the treated leukocytes should maintain protein expression effective to accomplish immune function, specifically to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen either in vivo or in vitro.
  • the compounds may include a moiety capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid which is photoactivatable or chemically reactive.
  • the compound inhibits proliferation of cells by forming covalent bonds with the genomic DNA, thus interfering with the function of DNA polymerases and rendering the leukocytes non-proliferating.
  • the number of covalent adducts that the compound forms with leukocyte nucleic acid can be modulated so that the compound inhibits proliferation but maintains immune functions effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen.
  • the effect can be modulated by adjusting the concentration of the compound and the length of time the leukocytes are contacted with the compound before removing unbound compound. The concentration required will depend on the characteristics of the particular compound, such as its solubility in aqueous solution and the DNA binding constant.
  • the compound will typically be used at concentrations effective to generate about 1 to 10 4 adducts of the covalent binding compound per 10 8 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA, preferably about 5 to 10 3 adducts, even more preferably, about 10 2 to 10 3 adducts. Ideally, the conditions for treating the leukocyte population will generate about 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of genomic DNA.
  • concentration of compound effective to achieve the leukocyte compositions of the present invention is the preferred concentration.
  • the PCT effect can be modulated by adjusting the concentration of the compound, the wavelength of light, and the length of time of exposure to that light.
  • concentration of the compound the concentration of the compound, the wavelength of light, and the length of time of exposure to that light.
  • the conditions for PCT using psoralen and other photoactivatable compounds are described in detail below.
  • Treatment conditions will be targeted to generate about 1 to 10 adducts of the covalent binding compound, per 10 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA, preferably about 5 to 10 4 adducts, even more preferably, about 10 to 10 adducts. Ideally, the treatment conditions will generate about 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of genomic DNA.
  • the number of compound-DNA adducts resulting from treatment can be measured e.g., by using radiolabeled DNA binding compound as described in the Examples below.
  • Another type of compound that can be used in the treatment of leukocytes is a small molecule that acts as an inhibitor of DNA replication.
  • Such small molecule replication inhibitors can optionally comprise a linker (frangible or otherwise) and an effector, as described above. Any of the steps of DNA replication can serve as a target for inhibition, including formation of an origin recognition complex (ORC), recruitment of the
  • the compounds of the present invention may be introduced into a suspension of leukocytes (leukocyte sample) in several forms.
  • the compounds may be introduced as an aqueous solution in water, saline, a synthetic media such as "SterilyteTM 3.0", or in the solution that the leukocytes are suspended in.
  • Synthetic media is herein defined as an aqueous synthetic blood or blood product storage media.
  • the compounds can further be provided as dry formulations, with or without adjuvants. The cell suspension is then agitated to mix in the compound.
  • the leukocytes to be treated with compound are resuspended in physiologically balanced solution such as plasma, synthetic media or a combination thereof.
  • physiologically balanced solution such as plasma, synthetic media or a combination thereof.
  • the leukocytes can be provided at a volume of from 200 mL to 1 liter.
  • the leukocytes for treatment will preferably be contained in a reaction vessel such as a blood bag. Blood bags are known in the art.
  • the effect of treatment with the compound on the viability and function of the leukocyte population can be monitored by in vitro as well as in vivo assays to determine the optimum treatment conditions that minimize proliferation and GVHD activity while maximizing cytotoxic function and/or the GVL effect.
  • Optimum conditions will vary with the properties of the compound used and will be validated for the disease or pathogen.
  • the most preferred PCT condition will comprise the lowest concentration of compound and the lowest light dosage found sufficient for providing a population of leukocytes that is arrested in proliferation but effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen.
  • the population of treated leukocytes will be characterized as follows. The cell viability of the population of treated leukocytes will be assessed.
  • Cell viability can be measured in vivo, for example, by PCR analysis to detect sequences specific to donor leukocytes, as described in the Examples section below.
  • the population of leukocytes will have a cell viability of at least 3 weeks. Fast clearance of leukocytes upon treatment may affect their ability to induce an antileukemic response.
  • Membrane integrity of the treated leukocytes is also necessary for a GVL effect to take place.
  • Membrane integrity can be determined by trypan blue or propidium iodide dye exclusion.
  • the PCT procedure, if used, is optimized for the light dose and/or the concentration of the compound which will maximize the number of leukocytes with intact membranes.
  • Proliferation activity can be measured, e.g., by Limiting Dilution Assay (LDA) or Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) Assay, as described in the Examples below.
  • LDA Limiting Dilution Assay
  • MLR Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction
  • the activity of the leukocytes in a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) assay will be predictive of the ability of the treated leukocytes to mediate GVHD in vivo.
  • GVHD can be measured by monitoring GVHD symptoms and/or morbidity and mortality induced by GVHD in MHC matched animals transfused with the treated leukocytes.
  • Leukocyte activity can be determined by monitoring cytokine synthesis, expression of surface antigenic markers and ability to lyse target cells. Expression of surface antigenic markers is determined through the use of the appropriate antigen-specific antibodies and standard FACS-SCAN analysis. The presence of antigenic markers, CD2,
  • CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD 18, CD25, CD69 (lymphocyte activation marker) and CD16/CD56 which are known to be involved in interactions associated with T-cell and NK cell activation and immune function, will be determined as a function of concentration of the covalent bonding compound and, if used, the PCT light dose. Stability of surface molecules under the PCT conditions is not expected to be influenced given the mild nature of PCT on proteins. Treatment conditions, for example, PCT, will be chosen such that they do not adversely affect the expression of the surface molecules or reduce cytokine production below desired levels (preferred levels disclosed above).
  • Cytolytic activity indicative of GVL activity can be measured, e.g., by lysis of human or mouse leukemia cell lines in a 51 Cr release assay.
  • the anti-leukemia effect can be assayed in vitro as described in Choudhury et al. Blood 89:1133-1142, 1997, or in vivo as described in Johnson et al. Blood 85:3302-3312, 1995.
  • Activity against solid tumors can be tested, e.g., using murine models of solid tumors.
  • the ability to mediate lysis of an infected cell or a pathogen can be assayed using infected animals in an animal model.
  • GVHD and GVL capabilities can also be measured in vivo as described in Examples 4 and 5 below.
  • the concentrations of compound determined to be effective will be tested on a representative number of patients and the most effective concentration of compound that results in alleviation of the patient's disease will be used. Conditions which work for the majority of patients will be most preferred.
  • the patients will generally be post BM transplant patients.
  • HLA-A and -B are HLA I genes and HLA-DR is a HLA II gene. Each of these genes exist in multiple different alleleic forms. Since each individual inherits 2 copies of chromosome 6 (containing HLA genes), the individual can express up to 6 different HLA-A, -B and -DR proteins (products of 2 different alleles at each locus).
  • the allogeneic donor is identical genotypically in 3 or more of the 6 HLA loci of HLA-A, B, and DR.
  • the donor and host are matched in 3 of the 6 HLA loci. Ideally, the donor and recipient are identical for HLA-A, B and DRB 1. Unrelated HLA-matched donors can be searched through the U.S. National Marrow Donor Program (NMPD). Currently, for patients up to the age of 55 years who receive unmodified non-T cell depleted graft, the patient's and donor's HLA-A, B and DRB1 genes have to be identical. A patient who is 36 years of age or younger may be transplanted from a donor who differs by no more than one minor antigen mismatch for HLA-A, -B or -DR.
  • NMPD U.S. National Marrow Donor Program
  • HLA-A or B minor mismatch is defined as 2 antigens that belong to the same cross reactive group.
  • An HLA-DR minor mismatch is defined as two haplotypes that express the same DR specificity but differ for DRB1 alleles.
  • the starting material for the leukocyte populations of the present invention can be provided, for example, by regional blood processing service centers similar to those currently in existence for the processing of peripheral blood stem cells, as well as other sources of hematopoietic stem cells, such as bone marrow.
  • Leukocytes from the donor can be apheresed (apheresis can be done at a variety of facilities including the local blood center or hospital blood bank) and treated at any appropriate facility equipped to perform the treatment. Alternatively, apheresed leukocytes can be shipped overnight to a Good
  • the treated leukocytes for DLI can then be sent by same day delivery to the patient's hospital for administration to the patient.
  • the treated leukocytes can be cryopreserved using methods known in the art such as by control rate freezing in 10%) DMSO and storage in liquid nitrogen (see Russel et al. Bone Marrow Transpl. 19:861-866,
  • the frozen leukocytes will be thawed and washed to remove the DMSO.
  • One conventional method for the preparation of purified leukocytes involves isolation from whole blood by density gradient centrifugation. This typically involves the isolation of T cell-enriched white blood cells by centrifugation through a Ficoll gradient.
  • the present invention contemplates processing blood as done by a leukophoresis machine (e.g., COBE Spectra Apheresis System, COBE BCT, Inc. Lakewood, CO) according to the manufacturer's directions.
  • a leukophoresis machine e.g., COBE Spectra Apheresis System, COBE BCT, Inc. Lakewood, CO
  • an apheresis machine that provides a leukocyte preparation with the lowest percentage hematocrit is used.
  • the leukocyte preparation can then be washed and diluted with the appropriate solution (plasma, infusion grade solution, etc. as described above) to achieve a final hematocrit of less than 0.5%.
  • Percoll separation can be applied as a further purification step if the above procedure was insufficient to reduce the hematocrit levels.
  • red cell removal methods are well-known to those of skill in the art.
  • selected cell subsets can be isolated from the leukocyte preparation, e.g., by using fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) using positive and/or negative selection with the appropriate antibodies that identify specific cell surface markers.
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • surface markers include, but are not limited to, CD4, CD8, CD16 and CD56.
  • Purified leukocyte populations are suspended in the appropriate solution as disclosed above.
  • the purified leukocyte populations can be treated immediately or cryopreserved for later treatment.
  • the purified, mixed leukocyte preparation is resuspended in an isotonic solution such as plasma, synthetic media, or a combination of the two.
  • the purified leukocyte population will generally be prepared at a cell density of 10 to 10 9 cells per ml, preferably 10 4 to 10 7 cells/ml, ideally 2 x 10 6 cells/ml.
  • the invention contemplates various scenarios for the preparation and administration or use of the treated leukocytes.
  • the peripheral blood or alternative leukocyte source including bone marrow or cord blood
  • the treated leukocyte populations can subsequently be used to infuse a patient.
  • compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid are suitable for the purposes of achieving the leukocyte population of the present invention.
  • These compounds preferably include a moiety which binds non-covalently with a nucleic acid, as well as the same or different moiety which is capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid.
  • the compound will preferably have the following properties: i) high binding affinity for nucleic acid; ii) solubility in aqueous solution; and iii) ability to penetrate the leukocyte membrane.
  • Moieties capable of forming a covalent bond with nucleic acid include chemically reactive moieties, which do not require an outside stimulation in order to be activated and react with a nucleic acid, and photoactivatable moieties, which react with nucleic acids only after stimulus in the form of electromagnetic radiation.
  • alkylator compound refers to a compound including at least one chemically reactive moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, in the absence of an external stimulus, such as light stimulation.
  • the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid further may be photoactivatable.
  • the "photoactivatable compound”, as defined herein, includes a moiety which is capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid upon photoactivation by stimulus of light of a certain wavelength.
  • the compound includes both a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, and a moiety capable of binding non-covalently with a nucleic acid.
  • the moiety which is capable of binding with a nucleic acid also may serve as the moiety which is capable of covalently reacting with the nucleic acid, and may be, for example, photoactivatable.
  • the alkylator compound comprises: a nucleic acid binding moiety; a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with nucleic acid ("referred to herein as an effector moiety"); and a frangible linker covalently linking the nucleic acid moiety and the effector moiety.
  • these compounds in aqueous solution, at appropriate pH values, have a period of activity during which they can bind to and react with nucleic acid. After this period, the compounds break down to products which are no longer able to bind well to nor react with nucleic acid.
  • alkylator compounds can be broadly described as an anchor, covalently bonded to a frangible linker, which is covalently bonded to an effector.
  • Anchor also referred to as “nucleic acid binding moiety” is defined as a moiety which binds non-covalently to a nucleic acid biopolymer (DNA, RNA, or synthetic analogues thereof).
  • Effector or “Effector moiety” is defined as a moiety which reacts with nucleic acid by a mechanism which forms a covalent bond with the nucleic acid.
  • “Frangible linker” is defined as a moiety which serves to covalently link the anchor and effector, and which will degrade under certain conditions so that the anchor and effector are no longer linked covalently.
  • the anchor-frangible linker-effector arrangement enables the compounds to bind specifically to nucleic acid (due to the anchor's binding ability). This brings the effector into proximity for reaction with the nucleic acid.
  • the nucleic acid binding moiety is selected from the group consisting of aromatic intercalators, acridines, acridine derivatives, ellipticenes, 2- polyamines, groove binders, and hydrophobic or shape selective binders.
  • the frangible linker comprises a functional unit selected from the group consisting of forward esters, reverse esters, forward thioesters, reverse thioesters, forward and reverse thionoesters, forward and reverse dithioic acids, sulfates, forward and reverse sulfonates, phosphates, and forward and reverse phosphonate groups.
  • the effector moiety preferably comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting of mustard groups, mustard group equivalents, epoxides, aldehydes, and formaldehyde synthons.
  • the effector portion of the compound reacts with nucleic acid present with which it comes into contact. Effector moieties which do not react with nucleic acid are gradually hydrolyzed by the solvent. Hydrolysis of the frangible linker occurs concurrently with the effector-nucleic acid reaction and effector hydrolysis. It is desirable that the frangible linker break down at a rate slow enough to permit inactivation of leukocyte proliferation; that is, the rate of breakdown of the frangible linker is slower than the rate at which the compound reacts with leukocyte nucleic acid.
  • the compound After a sufficient amount of time has passed, the compound has broken down into the anchor (which may also bear fragments of the frangible linker) and the effector- nucleic acid breakdown products (where fragments of the frangible linker may also remain attached to the effector), or into the anchor (which may also bear fragments of the frangible linker) and the hydrolyzed effector breakdown products (where fragments of the frangible linker may also remain attached to the effector). Additional fragments of the frangible linker may also be generated upon degradation of the compound which do not remain bonded to either the anchor or the effector.
  • the exact embodiment of the alkylator compound of the invention determines whether the anchor breakdown product or the effector breakdown product bears fragments of the frangible linker, or whether additional fragments of the frangible linker are generated which do not remain bonded to either the anchor or the effector breakdown products.
  • Preferred alkylator compounds are compounds which, upon cleavage of the frangible linker, result in breakdown products of low mutagenicity. Mutagenicity of the compounds, after hydrolysis of the effector, is due primarily to the anchor moiety, as the anchor interacts with nucleic acid and may have the potential to interfere with nucleic acid replication, even if the effector moiety has been hydrolyzed. After cleavage of the frangible linker, the anchor fragment has substantially reduced mutagenicity.
  • the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with nucleic acid is removed from the reaction mixture after a certain period of time.
  • the optimal reaction time can be determined empirically, as described infra in the Examples. Procedures and compositions for removal of compounds from the reaction mixture are provided in co-owned U.S. Patent Applications Serial Nos. 08/779,830;
  • anchor groups are available for use as the anchors, linkers, and effectors.
  • anchor groups which can be used in the alkylator compound include, but are not limited to, intercalators (including aromatic intercalators), minor groove binders, major groove binders, molecules which bind by electrostatic interactions or hydrophobic interactions, and molecules which bind by sequence specific interactions.
  • intercalators including aromatic intercalators
  • minor groove binders including aromatic intercalators
  • major groove binders molecules which bind by electrostatic interactions or hydrophobic interactions
  • sequence specific interactions molecules which bind by sequence specific interactions.
  • acridines and acridine derivatives, e.g.
  • fluorenones fluorenodiamines
  • phenazines phenanthridines, phenothiazines (e.g., chlorpromazine), phenoxazines, benzothiazoles, xanthenes and thioxanthenes, anthraquinones, anthrapyrazoles, benzothiopyranoindoles, 3,4-benzopyrene, 1-pyrenyloxirane, benzanthracenes, benzodipyrones, quinolines (e.g., chloroquine, quinine, phenylquinoline carboxamides), furocoumarins (e.g., psoralens and isopsoralens), ethidium, propidium, coralyne, and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons and their oxirane derivatives; distamycin, netropsin, other lexitropsins, Hoechst 33258 and other Hoechst dyes,
  • DAPI 4,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole
  • berenil and triarylmethane dyes
  • aflatoxins spermine, spermidine, and other polyamines
  • nucleic acids or analogs which bind by sequence specific interactions such as triple helix formation, D-loop formation, and direct base pairing to single stranded targets.
  • linkers which can be used in the invention are, but are not limited to, compounds which include functional groups such as ester (where the carbonyl carbon of the ester is between the anchor and the sp oxygen of the ester; this arrangement is also called “forward ester"), "reverse ester” (where the sp oxygen of the ester is between the anchor and the carbonyl carbon of the ester), thioester (where the carbonyl carbon of the thioester is between the anchor and the sulfur of the thioester, also called “forward thioester”), reverse thioester (where the sulfur of the thioester is between the anchor and the carbonyl carbon of the thioester, also called “reverse thioester”), forward and reverse
  • forward orientation is that orientation of the functional groups wherein, after hydrolysis of the functional group, the resulting acidic function is covalently linked to the anchor moiety and the resulting alcohol or thiol function is covalently linked to the effector moiety.
  • the reverse orientation is that orientation of the functional groups wherein, after hydrolysis of the functional group, the resulting acidic function is covalently linked to the effector moiety and the resulting alcohol or thiol function is covalently linked to the anchor moiety.
  • effectors which can be used in the invention are, but are not limited to, mustard groups, mustard group equivalents, epoxides, aldehydes, formaldehyde synthons, and other alkylating and cross-linking agents.
  • Mustard groups are defined as including mono or bis haloethylamine groups, and mono haloethylsulfide groups.
  • Mustard group equivalents are defined by groups that react by a mechanism similar to the mustards (that is, by forming an aziridinium intermediate, or by having or by forming an aziridine ring, which can react with a nucleophile), such as mono or bis mesylethylamine groups, mono mesylethylsulfide groups, mono or bis tosylethylamine groups, and mono tosylethylsulfide groups.
  • Formaldehyde synthons are defined as any compound that breaks down to formaldehyde in aqueous solution, including hydroxymethylamines such as hydroxymethylglycine. Examples of formaldehyde synthons are given in U.S. Pat. No. 4,337,269 and in International Patent Application WO 97/02028.
  • Alkylator compounds that can be used to prepare the leukocytes of this invention are described by the following general formulas I, II, and III.
  • General formula I is:
  • V is independently -R ⁇ -, -NH-Ri i- or -N(CH 3 )-R! i-, where -Rn- is independently
  • X is independently -Rn-;
  • E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R 12 ) 2 , -N(R ⁇ 2 )(R ⁇ 3 ), -S-R 12 , and
  • R 20 is -H or -CH ; and R 2 ⁇ is -R ⁇ -W-X-E, where -Rn- is independently -C ⁇ -8 alkyl-, -C 1- heteroalkyl-, -aryl-, -heteroaryl-, -C ⁇ -3 alkyl-aryl-, -C 1-3 heteroalkyl-aryl-, -C ⁇ -3 alkyl-heteroaryl-, -C] -3 heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-, -aryl-C ⁇ -3 alkyl-, -aryl-C ⁇ -3 heteroalkyl-, -heteroaryl-C 1-3 alkyl-, -heteroaryl-C] -3 heteroalkyl-, alkyl-, -C 1-3 heteroalkyl-aryl-C ⁇ -3 alkyl-, alkyl-, -C ⁇ -3 alkyl-aryl-C ⁇ -3 heteroalkyl-,
  • X is independently -Rn-;
  • E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R !2 ) 2 , -N(R ⁇ 2 )(Ri 3 ), -S-R 12 , and
  • R 4 , R 55 , R 3 , R4, R 5 , and R 8 is -V-W-X-E, and the remainder of R , R 55 , R 3 , R ⁇ R 5 , and R 8 are independently selected from the group consisting of -H,
  • V is independently -Rn-, -NH-Rj ⁇ - or -N(CH3)-Rn-, where -Ri 1- is independently
  • X is independently -Rn-; and E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R 12 ) 2 , -N(Ri2)(Ri3),
  • -R 12 is -CH 2 CH 2 -G, where each G is independently -CI, -Br, -I,
  • R 13 is independently -C1-8 alkyl, -C ⁇ -8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -C ⁇ - alkyl-aryl, -Cj_ 3 heteroalkyl-aryl, -C ⁇ .
  • the acridine nucleus is the anchor moiety
  • the -V-W-X- group(s) comprises the frangible linker
  • the E group(s) is the effector group
  • the psoralen nucleus is the anchor moiety
  • the -V-W-X- group(s) comprises the frangible linker
  • the E group(s) is the effector group.
  • General formula II is a subset of general formula I.
  • Examples 7-12 illustrate the synthesis of these compounds to produce the leukocytes of the invention.
  • S-59 4'-(4-amino-2-oxa) butyl-4,5',8- trimethylpsoralen
  • Photoactivatable compounds suitable for use in the methods of this invention include: Furocoumarins; Actinomycins; Anthracyclinones; Anthramycins; Benzodipyrones; Fluorenes and Fluorenones; Monostral Fats Blue; Norphillin A; Organic Dyes; Phenanthridines; Phenazathionium Salts; Phenazines; Phenothiazines; Phenylazides; Quinolines and Thiaxanthenones.
  • the preferred species of photoactivatable compounds described herein is commonly referred to as the furocoumarins.
  • Psoralens are planar, aromatic organic compounds belonging to the group of furocoumarins. Psoralens are found in nature, principally in plants, including limes, cloves, celery, parsnips and figs. In humans, psoralens have been used in photochemotherapy for the management of vitiligo, psoriasis and mycosis fungoides. For a review of psoralen photochemistry, see Parsons, B.J. Photochem. Photobiol. 32:813-821, 1980. The basic structure of psoralen is shown below.
  • the present invention contemplates psoralens, [7H-furo(3,2-g)-(l)- benzopyran-7-one, or b-lactone of 6-hydroxy-5-benzofuranacrylic acid], which are linear:
  • Psoralen derivatives are derived from substitution of the linear furocoumarin at the 3, 4, 5, 8, 4', or 5' positions.
  • psoralen is already present in our diets. Psoralens are relatively inactive in the absence of long- wavelength UVA radiation. The effective half-life of UVA-activated psoralen is measured in milliseconds. Any drug remaining after radiation returns to the inactive state, thus limiting side effects.
  • 8-Methoxypsoralen (known in the literature under various named, e.g., xanthotoxin, methoxsalen, 8-MOP) is a naturally occurring psoralen with low mutagenicity in the Ames assay.
  • AMT 4'-Aminomethyl-4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen
  • 4'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens are defined as psoralen compounds which have an NH 2 group linked to the 4'-position of the psoralen by a hydrocarbon chain having a total length of 2 to 20 carbons, where 0 to 6 of those carbons are independently replaced by NH or O, and each point of replacement is separated from each other point of replacement by at least two carbons, and is separated from the psoralen by at least one carbon.
  • 5'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens also referred to herein by the acronym “5-PAP” are defined as psoralen compounds which have an NH 2 group linked to the 5'- position of the psoralen by a hydrocarbon chain having a total length of 1 to 20 carbons, where 0 to 6 of those carbons are independently replaced by NH or O, and each point of replacement is separated from each other point of replacement by at least two carbons, and is separated from the psoralen by at least one carbon.
  • 4-PAP and 5-PAP as well as their methods of synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Patents Nos. 5,585,503; 5,578,736; 5,556,993; and 5,399,719.
  • Preferred psoralens include 5'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens and 4'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens (collectively referred to herein as PAP), 8-methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), 4'-aminomethyl 4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT), 5-methoxy psoralen (5-MOP), and trioxalen 4, 5' 8-trimethylpsoralen.
  • AMT, 5-MOP, 8-MOP, and trioxalen are commercially available.
  • the most preferred psoralen is S-59 which has the formula shown above (see under Abbreviations, S-59).
  • S-59 is a synthetic psoralen that can bind reversibly to nucleic acids by intercalation. Upon illumination with UVA, intercalated S-59 forms monoadducts and interstrand crosslinks with RNA and DNA. S-59 photochemical treatment is nucleic acid specific and S-59 readily penetrates cellular and nuclear membranes. S-59 combines a higher water solubility and nucleic acid binding affinity, with a high quantum yield for the formation of nucleic acid adducts. This allows the use of lower psoralen concentrations for PCT for inhibiting proliferation in the absence of nonspecific cellular damage.
  • a cell population comprising a population of leukocytes is treated with a photoactivatable compound including a moiety capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid upon photoactivation.
  • the photoactivatable compound must be activated by light.
  • Light encompasses ultraviolet light (UVA, UVB, UVC) and visible light.
  • wavelengths used for PCT range from 200-450 nm. In a preferred embodiment, the light used for PCT is in the wavelength of 320-400 nm.
  • the cell population is photochemically treated with UV light having a wavelength in the range of 320 to 400 nm. UVA radiation alone causes minimal damage to cells.
  • the photoactivatable compound comprises a psoralen molecule.
  • PCT with the appropriate concentration of psoralen and dose of UVA light will result in proliferation inhibition with the retention of leukocyte immunogenic functions effective, for example, to promote destruction of a diseased cell, an infected cell, or a pathogen, induce an antileukemic effect, facilitate engraftment by a second population of cells, promote immune reconstitution, facilitate immunotherapy, and treat mixed chimerism.
  • Psoralen reactivity is not only specifically directed towards the nucleic acids versus the proteins in a cell, but there is also a differential binding affinity of psoralens for DNA vs RNA molecules due to the difference in nucleic acid structure that allows better intercalation in DNA (Cimino, G.D. et al, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 54:1151-1193, 1985). Additionally, using this technology, it may be possible to differentially modify transcriptionally active (vs. inactive) genes, due to their different conformation and state of histone binding which will affect psoralen binding.
  • PCT cancer-derived neurotrophic factor
  • Treatments such as PCT therefore have the ability to interfere with cellular function, primarily at the level of DNA synthesis (replication), with a lesser effect on transcription, and minimal or no effect on protein synthesis.
  • the level of interference will be determined by the concentration of the psoralen and dose of UVA light used.
  • a photoactivation device suitable for the present methods of PCT comprises the following: (a) a means for providing appropriate wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation to cause photoactivation of a photoactivatable compound; (b) means for supporting a plurality of samples in a fixed relationship with the radiation providing means during photoactivation; and (c) means for maintaining the temperature of the samples within a desired temperature range during photoactivation.
  • the photoactivation device is capable of emitting a given intensity of a spectrum of electromagnetic radiation comprising wavelengths between 200 and 450 nm, preferably between 320 nm and 400 nm. Particular wavelengths can be selected using appropriate filters within the photoactivation device.
  • a suitable photoactivation device as well as methods of photoactivating photoactivatable compounds by the use of the device are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,184,020 and 5,503,721, both to Hearst et al. and in WO 96/39820.
  • Other photoactivation devices that may be used include General Electric type F20TI2-BLB fluorescent UVA bulbs (Alter, H. J., et al., The Lancet, 24:1446 (1988), and Type A405-TLGW/05 long wavelength ultraviolet lamp manufactured by P. W. Allen Co., London.
  • Stock solutions of psoralens are prepared in water or in the appropriate solvent as exemplified below in the Examples.
  • the stock psoralen solutions are added to suspensions of purified donor leukocyte populations to the desired final concentration. Units that were treated with 8-MOP were prepared by using PAS saturated with 8-MOP in the preparation procedure discussed above.
  • the purified donor leukocytes are illuminated with UVA light to a final dose of between 10 " to 100 J/cm in a photoactivation device. The samples are agitated during illumination. Samples of the leukocytes are taken prior to illumination as controls.
  • the PAP is added to the purified leukocyte preparation at a concentration of between 10 "4 and 150 ⁇ M, preferably between 10 "3 and 150 ⁇ M.
  • the leukocytes will generally be at a cell density of between about 10 to 10 9 cells/ml, preferably between about
  • PCT is performed on leukocytes combined with S-59 using ultraviolet light of wavelength of between 320-400 nm. Restricting the photoactivation process to wavelengths greater than 320 nm minimizes direct nucleic acid damage since there is very little absorption by nucleic acids above 313 nm.
  • the cells will preferably receive a light dose in the range of about 10 "3 to 100 J/cm 2 , more preferably 1 to
  • the light dose is at 3 J/cm 2 .
  • Illumination will generally be at a light intensity of between 1 to 50 mW/cm .
  • the time period for exposure of the leukocyte sample to UV light will be between about 1 second to 60 minutes, preferably about 3 minutes, more preferably about one minute.
  • the leukocyte samples will be assayed for effectiveness to proliferate and to participate in leukocyte activity, as described above and in the Examples.
  • cell viability cell viability
  • proliferation activity cell proliferation activity
  • cytokine secretion cell proliferation activity
  • surface antigen expression cell viability
  • the treated leukocyte populations of the present invention which are non- proliferating but retain immunological activity, have various prophylactic and therapeutic uses as described below.
  • individuals receiving DLIs containing treated leukocyte populations will include but are not limited to, transplant patients such as post BM transplant patients or patients anticipating a solid organ transplant.
  • transplant patients such as post BM transplant patients or patients anticipating a solid organ transplant.
  • the fact that the treated leukocytes do not elicit GVHD enables greater numbers of leukocytes (i.e. larger cell doses) to be administered in the DLI, thus maximizing the efficacy of treatment.
  • the treated leukocytes are useful for donor leukocyte infusion (DLI) especially to provide immunocompetence to allo-BMT patients, or immunocompromised patients such as elderly patients suffering from CLL.
  • DLI donor leukocyte infusion
  • DLI using treated leukocytes are useful to alleviate various conditions including the following: Leukemia including Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML), Chronic Lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML), Acute Myelogenous
  • AML Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
  • ALL Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
  • MM Multiple Myeloma
  • Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma and Hodgkin's lymphoma Large Cell Lymphoma (LCL); and Epstein-Barr virus induced B lymphoproliferative disorder (EBV-BLPD or EBV-induced lymphoma);
  • Solid tumors including breast, lung, ovarian, testicular, prostate and colon cancer, melanoma, renal cell carcinoma, neuroblastoma, head and neck tumors;
  • Aplastic anemia e.g. Myelodysplasia
  • Immunodeficiencies e.g. Common variable, SCID, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome,
  • DLIs are useful in various formats for prophylactic or therapeutic purposes: (a) adoptive immunotherapy for all allogeneic transplants;
  • the BMT light protocol is a two step process which involves: i) induction of transplantation tolerance using a minimum conditioning regimen and donor stem cells; and ii) immunotherapy with DLI repeatedly. This protocol circumvents the toxicity of chemotherapy regimens.
  • the BMT light protocol is suitable in the following indications: for patients who are not normally eligible for transplants, particularly elderly patients (> 65 years old); and for CLL patients, most of whom are severely immunocompromised. BMT light regimen reduces toxicity, GVHD, and infection.
  • An exemplary BMT light protocol is described in Example 13 below.
  • DLI provided concurrently with CD34+ selected cells are useful to confer adoptive immunotherapy against infections, such as by CMV, Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad), Kaposi's Sarcoma associated
  • PA-DLI is administered in haploidentical (haplo) transplantation.
  • haplo transplantation requires almost complete T cell depletion, leading to severe, sustained immunosuppression.
  • PA-DLI would be useful to maintain immunocompetence in the host; additionally, a GVL effect may be provided for the treatment of cancer.
  • the leukocytes of the present invention that are incompetent in GVHD but retain some immune function will be used in DLI for the alleviation of relapsing cancer or removal of minimal residual disease following allogeneic BMT, particularly in CML and acute leukemias, lymphomas and multiple myelomas.
  • the high number of donor CTLs specific to the bcr-abl protein of CML contributes to the efficacy of DLI in relapsing CML.
  • a cancer patient is determined to be suffering a "relapse' if malignant cells are detected, by means routinely used by physicians to monitor the presence of cancerous cells.
  • DLI containing the non-proliferating leukocytes is used in the treatment of leukemia patients during induction chemotherapy (initial round of chemotherapy) to avoid myeloablative regimens and to remove minimal residual disease.
  • induction chemotherapy initial round of chemotherapy
  • the toxic dose of chemotherapeutic drug given during induction could be reduced.
  • PA-DLI can also be applied in solid organ transplants (e.g., kidney, heart, skin) as a means to increase the lifetime of allografts and the chances of donor organ acceptance.
  • solid organ transplants e.g., kidney, heart, skin
  • Most of the organ rejections in the allogeneic transplant occur due to the presence of passenger leukocytes in the donor organ.
  • the DLI using leukocytes from the organ donor
  • Tolerization of the host for solid organ transplant would consist of the following: before or during organ transplant procedure, infusion of PA-DLI with or without donor stem cells with some level of myeloablative regimen to allow donor cells to survive in circulation. DLI may facilitate engraftment of donor stem cells in this setting, allowing for mixed chimerism in the host.
  • treated leukocytes can be administered to the host before, at the same time as, or after the transplant or graft. Multiple infusions of treated cell populations can be made at any of these times.
  • the non-proliferating, immune functional leukocytes are especially invaluable for DLI in patients for whom traditional allogeneic BMT would be contraindicated, because of advanced age or comorbid disease.
  • Elderly patients, (> 65 years old) presenting cancer are not prime candidates for allo BMT partly because the transplant cannot reconstitute an aged immune system very well and because of the severity of the procedure.
  • the only option available to control cancer in elderly patients is chemotherapy, the side effects of which can be intolerable for these patients.
  • the treated leukocytes of the present invention provide a much needed alternative to treating cancer in elderly patients and to providing immune defense against opportunistic infections. DLI will be useful to destroy cancerous cells without attendant GVHD.
  • the donor leukocytes In certain cases of treatment, it may be desirable to expand subpopulations of the donor leukocytes, particularly antigen-specific T cells and precursor cells, before subjecting the donor leukocyte population to treatment with the above-described compounds.
  • the leukocyte population can be stimulated with an antigen specific to the diseased cell (e.g., tumor-associated antigens) or pathogen to expand/enrich for the number of cytotoxic and helper T cells specific to the antigen.
  • the stimulation can be performed in vivo by vaccination of the donor with the appropriate antigen prior to isolation of the leukocytes from the stimulated donor; alternatively stimulation of isolated leukocytes can be carried out in vitro prior to treatment of the leukocyte population with the compound.
  • MM myeloma-specific precursor CTLs.
  • MM myeloma-specific precursor CTLs.
  • Pulsing dendritic cells with tumor-associated peptides for immunization of patients with non-Hodgkin's lymphoma is described in Hsu, FJ et al. Nat. Med. 2:52-58, 1996. Techniques of pulsing dendritic cells with peptide/antigens are reviewed in Stingl, G. et al.
  • cDNA immunization transfecting the dendritic cell with the appropriate cDNA
  • cDNA immunization is described in Pardoll, D. et al. Immunity 3:165-169, 1995.
  • donors can be vaccinated with bcr- abl peptides before isolation of donor leukocytes for treatment by the method of the invention and subsequent infusion.
  • Effective and immunogenic peptides for vaccination are described, e.g., by ten Bosch, G. et al. Blood 88:3522-3527, 1996.
  • donor leukocytes for the treatment of prostate cancer are pre-stimulated with prostate specific antigen (PSA) either in vivo or in vitro, before treatment according to the method of the invention.
  • PSA prostate specific antigen
  • Such vaccinations can be applied to boost precursor T cell populations and/or populations of T cells specific to other tumor specific antigens, viral antigens and antigens of other pathogens.
  • Leukocytes from donors vaccinated with the appropriate antigens are useful prophylactically or therapeutically, for providing an immunocompromised patient with immune defense against opportunistic infections such as cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus or adenovirus (Ad) infections.
  • CMV cytomegalovirus
  • EBV Epstein Barr virus
  • Ad Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus
  • Ad adenovirus
  • donors can be vaccinated against CMV antigens and their leukocytes isolated and subjected to treatment according to the methods of the invention for use in DLI to treat patients presenting CMV infections as a result of immunosuppression.
  • Immunocompromised patients include patients under immunosuppressive drug treatment such as organ transplant patients (BM and other organs), HIV or EBV infected individuals, cancer patients, and individuals with immune deficiency diseases.
  • Donor leukocytes can also be stimulated in vitro (also referred to as ex vivo expansion) to expand precursor pools.
  • donor leukocytes can be stimulated by in vitro culture with patient specific MM antigen presented by dendritic cells, before treatment to block GVHD activity.
  • Ex vivo or in vitro stimulation can also be employed to expand the population of antileukemic T cells for the treatment of CML.
  • CML the classical translocation of the c-abl oncogene on chromosome 9 to the break point cluster region (bcr) on chromosome 22 (t(9;22)(q34;ql 1) results in a bcr-abl fusion gene and the expression of the bcr-abl 210 kD fusion oncoproteins.
  • the bcr-abl fusion protein is CML specific and the two main variants of the bcr-abl protein are well characterized antigens.
  • In vitro stimulation to expand T cells specific for the bcr-abl protein can be performed as described, e.g., by
  • dendritic cells can be generated in vitro from peripheral blood cells of CML patients and used as antigen-presenting cells for the ex vivo expansion of antileukemic T cells (Choudhury et al, 1997, supra).
  • donor antigen-presenting cells APCs
  • APCs can be pulsed with antigen characteristic of a diseased cell, or can be co-cultured with diseased cells (e.g., inactivated tumor cells); and these APCs can then be exposed to donor leukocytes prior to infusion of the donor leukocytes into a recipient.
  • direct contact between the donor leukocyte and a diseased cell (or a diseased cell antigen) can be used to expand the T-cell population in the donor lymphocytes.
  • the "antigen" used to expand the T cells can be a polypeptide, a lipid or a carbohydrate moiety (or any combination, e.g., a glycoprotein), and can be isolated from the diseased cell or pathogen or recombinantly produced.
  • a polypeptide-containing antigen need not constitute a full-length protein, as long as it includes at least one epitope.
  • the antigen can be contained in a vaccine composition as a full length protein or fragment thereof or as a recombinantly produced fusion protein, and may or may not be conjugated or otherwise presented with an adjuvant.
  • the vaccine can take various forms: diseased cell expressing the antigen, or cell membrane preparation thereof; or the pathogen, preferably in inactivated form. Methods of preparing vaccines are taught in the literature, see, e.g.,
  • the leukocytes will generally be administered in plasma, synthetic media or other physiologically buffered solution at a dosage of about 10 5 to 10 11 leukocytes per kg weight per infusion, in a volume of about 50 to 500 ml or more. These parameters will vary with the treatment and disease and will be decided by the physicians treating the patient.
  • the standard DLI practice is to administer leukocytes at a dose of 10 7 to 10 8 cells per kg of body weight. DLI can be administered in conjunction with chemotherapy.
  • the leukocytes of the present invention will generally be administered intravenously.
  • GVHD is usually apparent within 90 days after the BMT.
  • DLI is performed preferably within 1 week to 3 months after diagnosis of relapse.
  • DLI can be delivered before to several years after BMT, as maintenance therapy.
  • the DLI is preferably administered soon after diagnosis of the cancer.
  • DLI can be provided before, during or after chemo and irradiation regimens or other therapeutic regimens. In all indications, the appropriate timing of the DLI will be determined by the physicians of skill in the treatment of the disease.
  • GVHD GVHD is usually apparent within 90 days post infusion.
  • Clinical GVHD symptoms include skin rash, swelling and lesions in the liver, gut, lungs and joints, severe diarrhea and jaundice.
  • the level of the patient's bilirubin and liver function enzymes can be measured and a liver biopsy can also be done.
  • Patients receiving DLI can be monitored regularly for detailed clinical history, physical examination, general laboratory evaluation including complete blood count and differential, urinalysis, blood urea nitrogen creatinine, bilirubin, aspartate transaminase (AST), alanine transferase (ALT), alkaline phosphatase, Na + , K + , CI " , albumin, total protein, glucose, and radiographic examination.
  • the status of the cancer can be assessed for example, by examination of marrow aspirates and biopsy, cytogenetic examination (including immunohistochemical analysis), and molecular analysis.
  • a recipient of the present treated leukocytes is alleviated of the disease (disease refers to malignancy or infection) if there is visible or measurable improvement in the symptoms of or resulting from the disease.
  • the symptoms and methods of assessing improvement in them will vary with the disease condition but will be familiar to the clinician.
  • One useful endpoint for evaluating treatment success is
  • the methods and compositions of the invention are also useful for prevention of GVHD is situations other than DLI. These include, but are not limited to, platelet transfusions and febrile, non-hemolytic transfusion reactions resulting from cytokine accumulation during platelet storage.
  • the present methods and the treated, non-proliferating leukocytes of the present invention also have in vitro uses.
  • the PCT procedure for example, is a minimally invasive method of inhibiting DNA synthesis without affecting the biosynthesis of cells in primary cultures or cell lines which have the ability to differentiate, such as progenitor cells and stem cells.
  • treatment conditions can be used to prepare isolated stem cells, leukocytes or other cell lines in an assay to test whether a cell differentiation or development step is dependent on proliferation/DNA synthesis.
  • Such studies may identify target molecules along the differentiation or development pathway and facilitate development of drugs for either inhibiting or promoting differentiation.
  • Treated leukocytes can also be used, e.g., as stimulator cells in a one way MLR assay, to stimulate immune responses of proliferation competent allogeneic cells without the simultaneous proliferation of the stimulator cells themselves.
  • PCT and related treatments using compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with DNA, would replace the current use of irradiation or mitomycin C to achieve cytostatis of the stimulator cells.
  • compositions of treated leukocytes or other cells can be provided either alone or as part of an assay kit.
  • the assay kit can be for MLR or for the differentiation assay.
  • the treated cells will generally be provided in frozen form.
  • kits may provide reagents and instructions for preparation of leukocytes or other cells having the above-described characteristics.
  • the reagents will include one or more compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with DNA.
  • a kit to be used for PCT will include one or more photoactivatable compounds, preferably a PAP or an acridine, more preferably, S-59.
  • test compound e.g. DNA replication inhibitor or mitogen
  • Media is prepared that typically contains 1 ⁇ Ci/50 ⁇ l/well using 3 H thymidine of approximately 20 Ci/mmol specific activity.
  • This media/label is added to the cells and the cells are incubated at 37°C for approximately 4-6 hours or longer.
  • a multichannel cell harvester is used to transfer cells to paper filter discs and to wash away free (unincorporated) label. The discs are then dried, transferred to vials and immersed in scintillation fluid. The vials can then be placed in an automated counter, counting for the full tritium range, and the average counts per minute (cpm) for triplicate samples is determined.
  • 3 H-labeled PAP was used to measure the extent of DNA modification.
  • PAP was added to the desired final concentrations in the purified leukocyte samples. Aliquots of 20 mL in mini-PL2410 plastic containers were illuminated with the appropriate UV light dose. The control sample was treated with PAP alone without UVA. After illumination, leukocyte DNA was purified. The DNA content of each sample was determined by measurement of absorbance at 260 nm. The number of psoralen adducts per 1,000 base pairs (bp) was calculated from the radioactivity in the DNA samples. A standard curve correlates the amount of 3 H counts with the number of adducts.
  • PCR Polymerase chain reaction
  • DNA samples (1 ⁇ g) obtained from photochemically-treated or gamma irradiated platelet concentrates were PCR amplified for a 242 bp sequence in the HLA-DQ ⁇ locus or for a 439 bp sequence in the ⁇ -globin gene locus.
  • Control (untreated) DNA was serially diluted (1 :10) and then amplified. The treated DNA was amplified without dilution. PCR amplification was carried out to 35 cycles. This assay provided a means to correlate functional T-cell proliferation inhibition, as measured in a cell proliferation assay, with direct modification of nucleic acid.
  • Example 1 demonstrated that leukocytes can be inactivated by PCT in a dose dependent manner.
  • exemplary psoralens S-59, AMT and 8-MOP were used.
  • the PCT dose dependence varies with the properties of the psoralen used, S-59 being the most efficient tested.
  • Fig. 1 The dose related effect of photochemical treatment with S-59 (Squares), 4'-aminomethyl 4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen [AMT] (triangles), and 8-methoxypsoralen [8-MOP] (circles) on leukocytes in platelet concentrates (PC) was characterized and the results shown in Fig. 1. Platelet concentrates were prepared and treated as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,593,823, incorporated herein by reference. Leukocytes from photochemically-treated and untreated pooled random donor PC were plated in an LDA assay. Varying concentrations of the three psoralens were used with a constant light dose of 1 Joule/cm 2 UVA.
  • T-cells were inactivated to the limit of detection by LDA (indicated by arrows) with 0.05 ⁇ M S-59, 1.0 ⁇ M AMT, and 10.0 ⁇ M 8-MOP. These data clearly demonstrate that S-59 is a superior photoreagent, compared to AMT and 8-MOP, in inhibiting proliferation of T cells.
  • Peripheral blood was drawn into anticoagulant citrate dextrose (ACD) tubes from four individuals.
  • the peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC's) were isolated by density gradient centrifugation over Ficoll.
  • the PBMC's from three donors were pooled and served as allostimulators.
  • the PBMC's from the remaining individual was used as the responder.
  • the stimulator and responder PBMC's were washed two times with RPMI supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2mM L-glutamine, 100 U/mL penicillin, and 100 ⁇ g/mL streptomycin and resuspended in the supplemented media.
  • FBS fetal bovine serum
  • streptomycin 100 ⁇ g/mL streptomycin
  • the stimulator PBMC's were exposed to 2500 cGy gamma radiation from a blood bank 137 cesium irradiator.
  • the stimulator cells were then plated in 96 well round bottom plates in aliquots of 100 ⁇ L containing 1.0 x 10 5 cells.
  • the responder cells were subjected to PCT with S-59 as follows. Responder cells were resuspended in 30 mL of the above cell culture media and aqueous S-59 stock solution (dissolved in water) was added to the cell suspension to the final concentrations specified in Figure 2, Figure 3 or Figure 4. The concentration of S-59 stock solution and volume used varied depending on the final S-59 concentration desired. The 30 mL cell solution containing S-59 was then transferred to a small PL2410 bag and illuminated with
  • UVA light at a dosage of 3 J/cm .
  • the light dosage was 3.0 J/cm .
  • the cells were then centrifuged, resuspended in cell culture media and plated in aliquots of 100 ⁇ L containing 1.0 x 10 5 cells and mixed with the stimulator cells for a final volume of 200 ⁇ L per well.
  • Example 3 demonstrated that leukocyte activity, as measured by cytokine synthesis and surface marker expression (exemplified by CD69 lymphocyte activation marker expression) can be modulated by the concentration of the psoralen and the light dose used for the PCT.
  • the data provide evidence that UVA light doses and concentrations of photoactivatable compounds can be titered to obtain appropriate ranges effective both to block proliferation of T cells in the leukocyte population, and to maintain leukocyte activity, as demonstrated by cytokine synthesis and surface marker expression.
  • the induction of the CD69 expression by leukocytes upon their activation by PMA and calcium ionophore was measured with the use of a fluorescent antibody to CD69 and FACS-Scan analysis (see Figure 6).
  • the expression of CD69 was measured as a function of time after photochemical treatment with different concentrations of AMT and 1 J/cm 2 UVA.
  • the effect of PCT on the induction of CD69 expression was also found to be psoralen dose dependent, with expression of CD69 showing greater inhibition at increasing concentrations of AMT. At the low doses anticipated for S-59 in this study, induction will remain intact.
  • Example 4 demonstrated that the effect of PCT on the properties of the treated leukocytes correlates with leukocyte DNA modification and inhibition of polymerase activity.
  • Psoralen adducts on leukocyte genomic DNA were measured after photochemical treatment in pooled random donor PC by using H radiolabeled S-59, AMT, and 8-MOP plus 1.9 J/cm 2 UVA and scintillation counting of the isolated DNA of treated leukocytes ( Figure 7). Photochemical treatment with 150 ⁇ M S-59, AMT, and 8-MOP induced 12.0, 6.0, and 0.7 adducts/1000 bp of DNA respectively.
  • the following murine transfusion model is a well characterized model that simulates the human clinical syndrome of TA-GVHD (Fast, LD et al. Blood 82: 292, 1993). Based on the promising in vitro results, the effect of S-59 photochemical treatment on the inhibition of TA-GVHD was evaluated, using this in vivo model, by transfusing splenocytes from a homozygous parent (strain A, H-2 a ) into immunocompetent heterozygous Fj hybrid recipients (strain B6AF 1? H-2 a/b ).
  • Each recipient (F was transfused with approximately 10 8 donor (A or Fj) splenocytes via the lateral tail vein.
  • Splenocytes obtained from density gradient centrifugation were used as the source of viable T cells.
  • Three transfusion groups were utilized: (1) handling control group (F ⁇ -»F
  • Recipients were monitored for biological evidence of TA-GVHD two weeks post- transfusion.
  • Spleens of recipients were analyzed for donor T-cell engraftment using two- color, fluorescence-activated flow cytometry.
  • splenic T-cells were stained with a pan-T-cell, anti-CD3 antibody and also with an anti-H-2 b antibody.
  • Donor A T-cells were detected by the absence of reaction with the anti H-2 b antibody.
  • recipients were labeled with the anti-H-2 b antibody.
  • cytotoxic lymphocytes CTLs
  • H-2 b 51 Cr-labeled EL-4 cells
  • the cytotoxic activity of CTLs was determined by the target cell lysis and release of 51 Cr into the culture medium. The results indicated that while recipients in the control F
  • TA-GVHD was characterized by splenomegaly, donor T-cell (H-2 a ) engraftment (28.6 ⁇ 11.3%) and the presence of CTLs (35 ⁇ 18.7% 51 Cr lysis) in recipient spleens (Table 1).
  • Splenomegaly was evaluated two weeks post-transfusion by measuring the spleen: body weight ratio. Development of immunodeficiency was detected by evaluation of thymic cellularity 3 weeks post-transfusion. Thymic hypoplasia is a reliable index of acquired immune deficiency associated with TA-GVHD. Recipients were also monitored for clinical symptoms of GVHD which included body weight, posture, activity, skin integrity, fur texture, white blood cell count, red blood cell count, and platelet count.
  • Tissue sections were prepared and examined for histologic abnormality after blind coding.
  • the liver was evaluated for the presence of lymphoid infiltrates with bile duct destruction and vascular endothelial inflammation and infiltration.
  • Splenic histology was assessed for preservation or destruction of lymphoid follicles.
  • Skin sections were evaluated for lymphoid infiltrates in sub-dermal areas and appendages.
  • Bone marrow sections were evaluated for cellularity and maturation within each major lineage: myeloid, erythroid, and megakaryocytic.
  • A- F ⁇ mice developed histologic evidence of GVHD in liver, spleen, bone marrow, and oral mucosa in a blinded study.
  • PCT- A photochemically treated donor cells
  • Fj syngeneic cells
  • Example 6 This example describes the approach for determining the PCT conditions suitable to suppress GVHD while preserving the GVL effect of DLIs for application, e.g., in the treatment of relapsing leukemia patients post-allogeneic BMT.
  • the experimental objectives are summarized below.
  • Stock solutions of psoralen are prepared as exemplified below.
  • a 15 mM stock solution of AMT was prepared by dissolving 50 mg of AMT powder in 10 mL of distilled water. The solution was mixed vigorously and filtered through a 0.2 ⁇ m syringe filter.
  • the concentration of AMT in the filtered solution was determined by measuring the absorbance of the solution at 250 nm using a Shimadzu UVI60U spectrophotometer.
  • AMT concentration was calculated using a value of 25000 M " 'cm " for the extinction coefficient.
  • a stock solution of S-59 psoralen was prepared by dissolving a powder of S-59 in distilled water. The solution was mixed vigorously and filtered through a 0.2 ⁇ m syringe filter. The concentration of S-59 in the filtered solution was determined by measuring the absorbance of the solution at 250 nm using a Shimadzu UV160U spectrophotometer. The
  • S-59 concentration was calculated using a value of 25400 M “ 'cm " for the extinction coefficient.
  • the stock psoralen solutions are added to suspensions of purified donor leukocyte populations to the desired final concentration.
  • Units that were treated with 8 -MOP were prepared by using PAS saturated with 8-MOP in the preparation procedure discussed above.
  • the purified donor leukocytes are illuminated with UVA light to a final dose of between 10 " to 100 J/cm in a photoactivation device.
  • the units were agitated at 70 cycles/min during illumination. Samples of the leukocytes are taken prior to illumination for use as controls.
  • the S-59 is added to the purified leukocyte preparation at a concentration of
  • the leukocytes will be provided at a cell density of 10 to 10 cells/mL, preferably at 10 7 cells/mL, more preferably at 2 x 10 6 cells/mL.
  • the sample of a leukocyte population mixed with S-59 is exposed to ultraviolet light of wavelength of between 200 and 450 nm, preferably 320-400 nm.
  • the cells will preferably receive a light dose in the range of about 10 "3 to 100 J/cm 2 . In a preferred embodiment, the light dose is at 3 J/cm .
  • the time period for UV light exposure will be about 1 second to 60 minutes, preferably about 1 minute.
  • the leukocyte samples will be assayed for the ability to proliferate and to participate in leukocyte activity, as described above and in the Examples. The following will be measured: cell viability and integrity; proliferation activity; surface antigen expression; cytokine secretion; GVHD and GVL activity.
  • the following assays can be applied to both alkylator compound-treated or photochemical treated leukocytes.
  • This assay directly measures the number of clonable T cells, which correlates directly in vivo with the incidence and severity of GVHD (Kernan, N.A. et al, Blood 68:770-773, 1986). LDA was used by the FDA to set the current guideline for gamma irradiation of blood products. This assay is conducted according to the procedure of
  • human leukocytes are assayed for the number of proliferating cells after PCT treatment with different concentrations of drug and a constant dose of light.
  • Lethally ⁇ -irradiated pooled allostimulator cells are used to stimulate growth.
  • Controls for proliferation include untreated leukocytes (as positive control for proliferation) and pre-PCT leukocytes that have been lethally ⁇ -irradiated
  • a correlation between the dose used and the number of cells that are proliferation-inhibited is determined for human leukocytes.
  • the dose response obtained from this experiment is expected to be similar to the one obtained for the leukocytes in platelet concentrates.
  • LDA was performed as follows. Leukocytes were isolated from peripheral blood by leukophoresis. Viable T-cells were stimulated to proliferate in wells of microtiter plates containing RPMI medium supplemented with fetal bovine serum (FBS), phytohemagglutinin (PHA), recombinant interleukin-2 (rIL-2) and T-cell growth factor (TCGF). Each well also contained 10 5 allostimulator cells prepared from a pool of FBS, phytohemagglutinin (PHA), recombinant interleukin-2 (rIL-2) and T-cell growth factor (TCGF). Each well also contained 10 5 allostimulator cells prepared from a pool of FBS, phytohemagglutinin (PHA), recombinant interleukin-2 (rIL-2) and T-cell growth factor (TCGF). Each well also contained 10 5 allostimulator cells prepared from a pool of FBS, phytohemagglutinin (PHA), recombinant interle
  • PBMCs from ten individuals and irradiated with 5000 cGy of gamma irradiation.
  • Leukocytes from each untreated control sample were diluted in two independent series. Aliquots of 100 ⁇ L containing in one series 10 5 , 10 4 , 10 3 , 10 2 , 10 1 and 10° cells or in a second series 300, 100, 33, 11 and 4 cells were plated per well. Each dilution was plated in ten replicates. An 11 mL aliquot of the photochemically treated sample containing 1.1 x 10 7 total leukocytes was cultured to detect viable T-cells. Aliquots of
  • microtiter plates were incubated in a CO 2 incubator at 37°C for 3 weeks. After
  • each well was fed with additional TCGF, FBS, rIL-2 and PHA. At the end of the 3 -week incubation period, each well was scored for the presence of T-cell clones. Wells with one or more T-cell clones were scored positive.
  • T-cell reduction factor fcontroi/ftreated, where f CO ntroi and f tre ated are T-cell frequencies for the control and treated samples, respectively.
  • Control aliquots were either not treated or were treated with UVA only or S-59 only. One aliquot was irradiated with the clinical dose of 2500 cGy of gamma. To the remaining aliquots, S-59 was added to final concentrations ranging from 10 "4 ⁇ M to 150 ⁇ M. They were then illuminated at a UV light dose ranging from 10 '3 to 100 Joules/cm .
  • This assay also known as the MLC test is conducted according to the procedure of Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 77:235-239, 1981 and Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 76:80-87, 1981.
  • Kraemer K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 77:235-239, 1981
  • Kraemer K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 76:80-87, 1981.
  • the lymphocytes of 2 HLA-disparate individuals When the lymphocytes of 2 HLA-disparate individuals are combined in tissue culture, the cells enlarge, synthesize DNA, and proliferate, whereas HLA-identical cells remain quiescent.
  • the DNA synthesis induced is determined through the incorporation of 3 H-thymidine into the nucleic acid inside the proliferating cells. Cells are then harvested, washed free of unbound radioactivity and counted in a beta counter for internalized radioactivity.
  • the leukocytes are assayed for their responder and stimulator functions in one-way MLR.
  • the standard, appropriate positive and negative controls are included.
  • the responder function is assayed by incubating responder cells with lethally ⁇ -irradiated pooled human leukocytes (stimulator cells).
  • the stimulator function of the treated leukocytes (treated by PCT or other alkylator compounds) is determined, after they have been lethally ⁇ -irradiated to block thymidine uptake, by incubating with normal pooled human leukocytes.
  • the results obtained as a function of treatment dose are compared to a two-way MLR.
  • the MLR will provide a subset of the information provided by LDA, it is able to provide information on the ability of treated leukocytes to stimulate other cells.
  • Stimulation by treated leukocytes in an MLR can be used as a model for the induction of an immune response against leukemia, activated by the DLI in a BMT transfused patient.
  • the immune response against leukemia may be launched by the host or donor cells present in the BMT.
  • Example 14 for characterization of treated human lymphocytes with respect to proliferation, surface marker expression, cytokine synthesis and cytotoxic activity.
  • the cytolytic ability is investigated against a series of human and mouse leukemia cell lines (available from ATCC). The experiment is conducted according to the conditions of Jiang, Y.Z. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 8:233-238, 1991. Leukemia cells are labeled under standard conditions with 51 Cr as described in Coligan, J.E. et al, Current Protocols in Immunology: Current Protocols. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1991. Any lysis achieved will be measured by the release of 51 Cr radioactivity in the supernatant and compared to controls for background and total lysis. The effect of the treatment dose on the cytolytic ability of treated T-cells is monitored.
  • cytotoxic activity can be determined by measuring cytokine production, e.g., IFN- ⁇ , IL-2 or GM-CSF production.
  • cytokine measurements are conducted through the use of commercially available Elisa kits (R&D Systems) in culture supernatants following co cultivation of effector cells with stimulator cells. Assays are performed according to the instructions provided by the Elisa manufacturer. Results are evaluated by comparing absorbance measurements for each sample to a standard curve generated by cytokine standards supplied with each assay kit. Cytokine measurements are performed on treated leukocytes as a function of the compound concentration and, in the case of PCT, of the light dose, as well as the time interval between treatment and measurement. IL-1 , IL-2,
  • IL-4, IL-10, IFN- ⁇ cytokines are measured because of their established role in T-cell activation and GVHD/GVL.
  • Measurement of cytokine synthesis by treated leukocytes is important in determining the capability of the cells to function as inducers of an immune response through their production; it also serves as a measure of biochemical function and protein synthesis.
  • mice are a well established model for studying graft vs host disease and graft versus leukemia effects. In order to differentially assess the effect of treated leukocytes on
  • mouse splenocytes are subjected to treatment before transfusion to test the inhibition of GVHD by the treatment, as measured by mortality, and also to provide the lowest dose to inhibit the onset of GVHD.
  • Splenocytes are the accepted substitute for blood leukocytes in mice since the volume of blood in mice is too small for such experiments.
  • the recipients are infused with, for example, PA allogeneic splenocytes and then challenged 7 days later with AKR leukemia cells.
  • AKR leukemia cells Infusion of the mice with 5 X 10 4 AKR leukemia cells after recovery from BMT (28 days) is known to result in leukemia and 95% mortality 25 days after the leukemia challenge (Johnson, B.D. et al, Transplantation 54:104-112, 1992).
  • infusion with allogeneic splenocytes 21 days after BMT has been shown to induce a GVL effect upon challenge with AKR cells 7 days later. This course of action results in 70% survival after 70 days.
  • treatment of the splenocytes before transfusion will allow the detection of induction of GVL in the absence of GVHD. This is measured by the survival rate of treated splenocyte-infused BMT recipients, which were challenged with AKR cells.
  • the effect of DLI using treated leukocytes on the survival of a leukemic challenge is tested as a function of the treatment dose and compared with a control group where infusion of untreated splenocytes is performed.
  • the surviving mice are tested for chimerism and leukemic load through the use of a reported PCR assay as described in Johnson, B.D. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 11 :329-336, 1993).
  • a leukemic cause of death can be diagnosed by either white cell count or PCR analysis of the blood immediately before death, since leukemia will cause an expansion of the AKR leukemic cells. Primers specific to AKR leukemia cell specific markers will be used for the PCR analysis.
  • GVHD Death from GVHD is diagnosed by low white cell count and spleen atrophy, as well as through characteristic clinical symptoms (fur and posture changes, sticky feces etc.).
  • the efficacy of PA-DLI against minimal residual disease or higher tumor load is tested by injecting smaller or larger numbers of AKR leukemia cells.
  • Treatment of leukocytes according to the invention is deemed to be efficient to induce a GVL effect if, under conditions which do not cause GVHD, it induces a statistically significant increase in the survival of the mice treated with the treated-cell DLI, after a leukemic challenge is administered.
  • the genetic type of the surviving animals should also be completely chimeric as this has been associated in humans with a higher incidence of a disease-free long-term survival. Increase of survival will be easy to demonstrate within 100 days after the original BMT.
  • Splenocytes will be subjected to treatment under conditions described above for donor leukocytes.
  • Table 2 indicates the designation of compound number used for the various compounds.
  • Step A ⁇ -Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester
  • Step B ⁇ -Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino] ethyl ester
  • reaction mixture was allowed to warm to 23 °C and stirred for 2 h followed by removal of the resultant white precipitate (imidazole » HCl) by vacuum filtration.
  • the acetonitrile was removed in vacuo from the filtrate and the remaining material was partitioned between saturated brine (600 mL) and EtOAc (3 x 200 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4.
  • Step C ⁇ -Alanine, 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino] ethyl ester
  • N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl) 2-[bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester from step B
  • 2-[bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester from step B (3.01 g, 5.48 mmol) was added neat trifluoroacetic acid (5 mL) resulting in the evolution of CO2 gas.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min. and the trifluoroacetic acid was removed in vacuo.
  • Step D ⁇ -Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester
  • the ⁇ -Alanine, 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester (736 mg, 1.64 mmol) was reacted with methyl 9-methoxyacridine-2-carboxylate (669 mg, 2.50 mmol) by stirring in 10 mL of CHCI 3 for 12.5 h at room temperature.
  • Example 7 The compounds synthesized in Example 7 can also be prepared by the following method: Synthesis of ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride (Compound V): Method II
  • Step A ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), methyl ester hydrochloride 9-Chloroacridine (11.7 g, Organic Synthesis, Coll. Vol III, pg. 57), ⁇ -alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (9.9 g) and sodium methoxide (3.26 g) were combined and 60 mL of methanol was added. The mixture was stirred with a magnetic stirrer and refluxed for 5.5 h . Heat was removed and the suspension was filtered while warm ( ⁇ 35 °C). The solid salts were rinsed with about 10 mL of additional methanol and the combined dark green filtrate was concentrated to give 21 g of a moist greenish-yellow solid.
  • Step B ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride
  • the ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), methyl ester hydrochloride, from Step A, (5.00 g) was partitioned between toluene (750 mL), saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (200 mL) and H2O (50 mL).
  • the aqueous layer was extracted again with toluene (3 x 250 mL) and the organic layers were combined and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (50 mL).
  • the volume of toluene was reduced to about 100 mL by rotary evaporation.
  • Triethanolamine (30 mL) was then added to form a partially immiscible system.
  • the acid solution was made basic with powdered K2CO3( s ) in the presence of CH2CI2 (200 mL).
  • the organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted again with CH2CI2 (5 x 100 mL).
  • the combined organic layers were washed with brine (50 mL), dried with anhydrous Na2SO4(s), and stripped to give crude diol free amine (5.02 g), a sticky yellow gum.
  • This material was identical by NMR to that prepared in Example 1 by an alternate procedure.
  • Step C ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)arnino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride
  • Example 10 0 ⁇ -alanine, N-(4-methoxy-acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride,
  • ⁇ -alanine, N-(4-methoxy-acridin-9-yl), methyl ester was prepared by mixing 1.4 g (5.84 mmol) of 4,9-dimethoxyacridine, 0.89 g (6.42 mmol) of ⁇ -alanine methyl ester hydrochloride and 20 mL of methanol and then heating to reflux for 12h under N2- The reaction was then concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in CHCl3-isopropanol (50 mL, 4:1 v/v), and washed with 50% NH4OH (2 x 25 mL) and brine (1 x 25 mL).
  • the dihydrochloride salt could be isolated in crude form by concentrating the reaction in vacuo with azeotropic removal of excess thionyl chloride (2 x 5 mL toluene). HPLC analysis indicated complete consumption of the starting material and 4-methoxy acridone (Rj 22.3 min) to be the major impurity.
  • Step A ⁇ -Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]ethyl ester
  • Step B ⁇ -Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]-
  • the ⁇ -Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)-ethyl] ethyl ester from Step A above (5.60 g, 10.8 mmol) and lithium hydroxide (0.59 g, 14.1 mmol) were stirred in ethanol and refluxed for 3h. The solvent was removed and the crude product was partitioned between CH2CI2 and dilute NaHCO3(aq.).
  • Step C ⁇ -Alanine, [N,N-bis(2 -hydroxy ethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester
  • Step D ⁇ -Alanine, [N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound XI.
  • Step A [N,N-Bis(2-hydroxyethyl)]-2-aminoethyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate
  • a slurry of methyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate (250 mg, 0.832 mmol), triethanolamine (12 mL) and 1M HCl in ether (2 mL) were stirred at 100°C for 2 h.
  • the resulting clear brown solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and partitioned between CH 2 CI2 and saturated NaHCO 3 (aq.).
  • the organic layer was rinsed several times with saturated NaHCO 3 (aq).
  • Step B [N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)]-2-aminoethyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate hydrochloride
  • the patient presenting CLL is given a nonablative preparative regimen prior to transplantation with allogeneic peripheral blood stem cells. Transplantation is followed by support with DLI as necessary to achieve a maximum graft-versus-malignancy effect.
  • the mildly toxic preparative regimen is fludarabine (FAMP)-based and is modified according to malignancy type.
  • FAMP fludarabine
  • the patient is given FAMP at 300 mg/m2/dx3 with cyclophosphamide at 30 mg/m2/dx3.
  • Richter and Large Cell Lymphoma (LCL) are treated with a regimen consisting of FAMP 30 mg/m2/dx2, cisplatinum 25 mg/m2/d/CIx4, and Ara-c 0.5 gm mg/m2/dx2.
  • GVHD prophylaxis With the exception of treatment for LCL, no GVHD prophylaxis is given.
  • the regimen is intended to generate chimerisms and allow engraftment while decreasing the toxicity of conventional induction therapy.
  • DLI can be given 1 month post-transplant to boost engraftment. Successful engraftment allows for subsequent DLI administered as necessary to enhance a graft vs. leukemia effect and expedite immune recovery.
  • PBLs peripheral blood lymphocytes
  • PBLs subjected to 10 nM S-59 at 3 J/cm 2 UVA were assayed for viability by trypan blue exclusion. Survival was 75% after 2 days, 50% after three days, and 25% after 4 days. In related experiments, a dose-dependent survival of treated lymphocytes was observed.
  • Lymphocyte proliferation was measured by 3 H-thymidine incorporation into the DNA of allostimulated T-cells.
  • Peripheral blood mononuclear cells PBMCs
  • PBMCs Peripheral blood mononuclear cells isolated from three donors, pooled, ⁇ -irradiated (2500 cGy) to prevent autostimulation, and used as stimulator cells in a MLR.
  • PBMCs isolated from a fourth donor were used as responder cells.
  • Responder cells were treated with 0.05, 0.5 or 5 nM 4'-(4-amino-2-oxa) butyl-4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen ("S-59”) at 3 J/cm 2 UVA and co-cultured with stimulator cells. Control, untreated responder cells were also co-cultured with the stimulator cells.
  • FIG. 8 shows that proliferation of treated leukocytes, as measured by 3 H-thymidine uptake in a MLR, was eliminated in a dose-dependent manner between 0.1 nM and 10 nM S-59, with complete inhibition of proliferation at 10 nM S-59.
  • Proliferative ability of treated leukocytes was also analyzed by an alternative method, in which treated cells were activated by surface-bound anti-CD3 antibody.
  • PBMCs were either untreated, treated with 0.0001, 0.001 or 0.01 ⁇ M S-59 at a UVA dose of 3 J/cm 2 , or irradiated in the absence of S-59.
  • Cells were then incubated at 37°C in 5% CO 2 in plates to which anti-CD3 antibody had been attached, to induce polyclonal activation of T-cells, and H-thymidine incorporation was measured after 1 , 2 and 3 days of culture.
  • the results, ( Figure 9) show a dose-dependent reduction in proliferative capacity under all treatment conditions, and complete inhibition of proliferation at 10 nM
  • Human lymphocytes were cultured in a MLR as described in the previous section on analysis of proliferation. Responder cells were treated with different concentrations of
  • FIG. 10A Analysis of IL-2 production is shown in Figure 10A.
  • Secretion of IL-2 by untreated lymphocytes and by lymphocytes treated with lower concentrations of S-59 (i.e., 0.05 and 0.5 nM) peaked at 2 days in culture, and then declined due to consumption of IL-2 by proliferating lymphocytes in the population.
  • S-59 i.e., 0.05 and 0.5 nM
  • lymphocytes treated with 5 nM S-59 IL-2 was not consumed by the non-proliferating leukocytes, and remained present in the medium, at fairly high levels, at days 4, 6 and 7.
  • Lymphocytes were obtained by Ficoll gradient centrifugation, and were activated through in vitro stimulation by surface-bound anti-CD3 antibody. Surface antigen expression by activated, treated lymphocytes was measured by fluorescence-activated cell sorting
  • FACS Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting
  • CD69 is an early marker of lymphocyte activation.
  • Figure 11A shows that cells treated with either 1 nM or 10 nM S-59 + 3 J/cm 2 UVA have surface CD69 levels similar to, or slightly higher than, those of untreated cells, for up to 48 hours post-treatment. Thus, although treated cells are unable to proliferate, signalling pathways related to activation remain functional.
  • CD 25 is the IL-2 receptor, and its expression is detected somewhat later (after activation) than that of CD69.
  • Figure 1 IB shows that, in cells treated with either 1 nM or
  • the CD40 ligand (CD40L) on T-cells recognizes the CD40 molecule expressed on the surface of B-cells as part of the T-cell activation process. Inhibition of CD40L expression on T-cells can induce cell unresponsiveness or anergy. Therefore, unperturbed expression of CD40L on T-cells after treatment is an indication of normal T-cell activation.
  • the effect of PCT on expression of CD40L was examined following activation of treated cells with anti-CD3 antibody ( Figure 12). The results of this analysis indicate that, for treatment conditions under which subsequent proliferative ability is abolished, CD40L expression by treated cells closely parallels that observed in untreated cells.
  • cytotoxic T-cells against gamma irradiation-inactivated allogeneic "stimulator" cells in a MLR. These cytotoxic T-cells were then tested for their ability to lyse 51 Cr-labeled target cells that were obtained from the same donor used to provide the inactivated stimulator cells.
  • PBMCs Peripheral blood (100 ml) was removed from two donors, one designated the "stimulator” and the other, the “responder.”
  • PBMCs were isolated from both populations by Ficoll gradient centrifugation.
  • Responder PBMCs were depleted of monocytes by placing them in a tissue culture flask, at a cell density of 5x10 6 cells/ml, for one hour.
  • Stimulator PBMCs were ⁇ -irradiated (2500cGy) to block cell division. Both the monocyte-depleted responders and the irradiated stimulators were separately resuspended in RPMI complete medium to a concentration of lxl 0 6 cells/ml. Equal volumes of responder and stimulator cell suspensions were then combined for MLR, and incubated at 37°C for 7 days in a 5% CO 2 incubator.
  • Peripheral blood 50 ml was drawn from the same donor that provided the stimulator cells for MLR.
  • PBMCs were isolated as above and resuspended at a concentration of 1 x 10 6 cells/ml in RPMI medium, then stimulated with 2 ⁇ g/ml PHA-M (phytohemagglutinin-M) and 10 Units/ml of recombinant IL-2 for 7 days at 37°C.
  • PHA-M phytohemagglutinin-M
  • Target cells were incubated in the presence of 200 ⁇ Ci Na 2 51 CrO 4 at 37°C for two hours, then washed three times to remove unincorporated label.
  • Responder cells (monocyte-depleted, as described above) were divided into four equal portions, each of which was resuspended in 30 ml of PBS containing 1% bovine serum albumin. S-59 was added to three of the portions to a final concentration of 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 ⁇ M; the remaining portion served as an untreated control. Samples containing S-59 were transferred into 30 ml 2410 blood bags and each was illuminated with 3 J/cm UVA on a Baxter/Fenwall UVA illumination device.
  • Cytotoxic T-lymphocyte (CTL) activity of the treated responder cell population was assayed as follows.
  • the treated cells or control untreated cells
  • the treated cells were resuspended to a final concentration of 5 x 10 6 cells/ml in a final volume of 1 ml, and serial two-fold dilutions were made to obtain final concentrations of 2.5 x 10 6 , 1.25 x 10 6 and 0.625 x 10 6 cells/ml.
  • a 100 ⁇ l sample of the resuspended treated responder cells and of each treated responder cell dilution ("effector cells”) was added to each of three wells of a round- bottom 96-well microtiter plate.
  • a 100 ⁇ l sample of labeled target cells (prepared as described above), containing 5 x 10 3 cells, was then added to each well of effector cells, to give effector cel target cell ratios of 100:1, 50:1, 25:1 and 12.5:1, and the mixtures were incubated at 37°C for 4 hours. After the incubation, the plate was centrifuged for 5 min at 250 x g, and 100 ⁇ l of supernatant was removed from each well. The amount of 51 Cr in the supernatants was quantitated on a gamma counter. Average 5I Cr cpm, and standard deviation, for each triplicate set of wells was calculated. Controls
  • Unlabeled target cells were diluted and plated with labeled target cells, at the same ratios as the effector cells, to measure spontaneous release of 51 Cr. Labeled target cells were also incubated with RPMI and 1% Triton X-100 (3 wells each) to measure maximal release of 51 Cr. Average 5 l Cr cpm, and standard deviation, for each triplicate set of wells was calculated.
  • Figure 13 shows data for release of 51 Cr at different effector :target (or unlabeled target: labeled target) ratios for treated and untreated leukocytes.
  • Donor splenocytes were passed through a fine mesh screen to obtain single-cell suspensions of unseparated splenocytes and were then treated with 0.01 ⁇ M S-59 and varying doses of UVA (0.5 min, 1 min, 2 min and 8 min).
  • mice 1.2 + ) were injected into AKR, H-2k, Thy 1.1 + hosts that had been subjected to 1100 R of total body irradiation.
  • Each group of mice (6 animals per group) was challenged with 250 AKR-M2 leukemia cells 3 days after transplant. Transplanted animals were observed for clinical symptoms of GVHD, leukemia relapse and death. In addition, body weight of the transplanted animals was recorded every 3-4 days after transplant.
  • lymphocytes treated with 1 min of UVA + 0.01 ⁇ M S-59 were effective in preserving their GVL activity (3 of 3 survivors at 70 days post-leukemia challenge) with no signs of GVHD. See Table 3 and Figure 15. Body weight of animals treated with 1 min of UVA + 0.01 ⁇ M S-59 ( Figure
  • PBMCs Peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • PBMCs isolated from a different donor were used as responder cells.
  • Responder cells at a concentration of 2xl0 6 cells/ml were treated with 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 ⁇ M ⁇ -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester (S-303) at room temperature for approximately 15 min and washed twice with PBS containing 1% bovine serum albumin.
  • S-303 -treated and untreated responder cells were co-cultured with the gamma-irradiated stimulator cells at a 1 :1 ratio.
  • Lymphocyte proliferation was measured by addition of 3 H-thymidine to the co- culture six days after the start of co-culture, harvesting cells on day 7, and measuring incorporation of H cpm in the cells. Cytokine production was analyzed by sandwich ELISA of culture supernatants taken 24 and 48 hours after the start of co-culture.
  • IFN- ⁇ Gamma interferon

Abstract

The invention provides methods and compositions for treating leukocytes to arrest proliferation of the leukocytes and render them ineffective in eliciting graft-versus-host disease (GVHD), but effective to enhance engraftment of allongeneic donor cells and promote destruction of diseased cells or pathogens. Leukocyte compositions and methods of use of these compositions in alleviating disease, facilitating various types of immune reconstitution and immunotherapy, and enhancing engraftment of allogeneic donor cells, are also provided.

Description

METHOD OF TREATING LEUKOCYTES, LEUKOCYTE COMPOSITIONS AND
METHODS OF USE THEREOF
REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial
No. 60/053,599, filed July 21, 1997.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to cell compositions that are incapable of proliferation but retain function, and the methods of preparation and use of such compositions. More specifically, the present invention relates to methods for preparing proliferation inhibited leukocytes for use in transfusion.
BACKGROUND Bone marrow transplantations (BMT) are performed to treat a variety of malignant and nonmalignant hematologic diseases, including leukemias, multiple myeloma, lymphomas, anemias, and immunodeficiency diseases such as severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome and aplastic anemia.
Leukemias are malignant neoplasms of hematopoietic tissues. These neoplasms are categorized into two predominant forms: chronic and acute. While acute leukemias are characterized by undifferentiated cell populations (e.g. Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia or "ALL" and Acute Myelogenous Leukemia or "AML"), chronic Leukemias usually present a more mature morphology (e.g., Chronic Myelocytic Leukemia or "CML" and Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia or "CLL"). In the United States in 1995, there were approximately 25,700 new cases of leukemia, of which about 4,500 were CML. In 1996, approximately 7,000 new cases of CML were diagnosed in the U.S. of which approximately 30% will ultimately receive an allo BMT (Leukemia Society: Leukemia Society Web Site, 1997). About 50% of the BMT patients are expected to suffer a relapse in the leukemia. The general goal of leukemia therapy is to arrest the proliferation of abnormal morphologies and restore "normal" hematopoiesis in the bone marrow. Treatment regimens may include a combination of chemotherapy, radiation therapy, and bone marrow transplantation. In a "generic" allogeneic bone marrow transplantation (allo- BMT) protocol, a leukemia patient is first given a myeloablative dose of chemoradiotherapy. This phase of treatment is designed to eradicate all leukemia cells and their progenitors. Having arrested the pathological hematopoietic physiology, the functionally inoperative bone marrow is subsequently replaced with allogeneic disease- free stem cells. In optimal circumstances, this transplanted marrow facilitates the restoration of normal polyclonal hematopoietic proliferation. The improvement in disease control also relies on an immune mediated response of the graft against the leukemia cells, referred to as the graft- versus-leukemia (GVL) effect.
Bone marrow is not the exclusive source of hematopoietic progenitors. Peripheral blood and cord blood may also be used as a source of stem cells. See McCullough, The
New Generation of Blood Components, Transfusion, 35:374 (1995). Trophic factors (such as granulocyte-colony-stimulating factor) may be administered systemically to increase the proliferation of peripheral blood stem cells thereby creating alternatives to bone marrow for the harvest of hematopoietic progenitors. Unfortunately, the major obstacles to successful BMT are Graft- versus-Host
Disease (GVHD), infections and relapse of the underlying disease. GVHD and infections are responsible for 10-30% of morbidity and mortality in the first 100 days following transplantation (Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Daniel P. Stites, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G. Parslow (eds.), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT, 1994). If the BMT fails, a "relapse" can result from the unchecked proliferation of residual tumor cells. See Slavin et al, "Immunotherapy of Minimal Residual Disease by Immunocompetent Lymphocytes and their Activation Cytokines," Cancer Investigation, 10:221 (1992). The medical treatment options in the past have been quite limited in such situations. For example, second bone marrow transplants and/or the extended use of cytotoxic drugs are associated with poor survival.
Nonetheless, a treatment strategy has emerged from a more complete understanding of the transplant biology. Studies on BMT with or without T-cell depletion showed that T-cells are important for the antileukemic treatment which can be useful in the management of minimal residual disease or "full blown" relapse in CML patients. With this understanding, treatment of leukemia patients with Donor Leukocyte Infusion (DLI) after bone marrow transplants has become an accepted treatment. See Kolb et al. , Blood 76:2462 (1990); Lim, S.H et al., Am. J. Hem. 54:61-67, 1997; Giralt, S.A. et al., Cur. Op. One. 8:96-102, 1996; Barrett, J. et al, Cur. Op. One. 8:89-95, 1996. Transfusion of leukocytes has also been used as adoptive immunotherapy after failure of bone marrow transplantation to induce permanent remission. See J. McCullough, "The New Generation of Blood Components," Transfusion 35:374 (1995). DLIs are particularly effective for the treatment of CML, but are also used for the treatment of AML, ALL and CLL. DLIs have also been used for the treatment of myelodysplasia (MDS), non-Hodgkin's lymphoma,
Hodgkin's disease and multiple myeloma. The infused cells seem to generate an immune response against the recipient's malignant cells. Approximately 70% of the patients with CML relapsing into a chronic phase have achieved durable cytogenetic remissions after DLI and become negative for residual disease by PCR analysis for the bcr-abl rearrangement (Philadelphia chromosome)(Drobyski, W.R. et al, Blood 82:2310-2318,
1993).
This approach has risks, however, since GVHD occurs in 80%, and marrow aplasia in 56%o, of the patients. These are the two major causes of treatment failure, accounting for the deaths of up to 20% of responding patients (Champlin, R. et al, Act. Haemat. 95:157-163, 1996). GVHD results from donor T-lymphocytes present in the transfused
BMT or DLI, proliferating and colonizing host tissues. Once proliferated, the donor T-cells attack host tissues causing the pathological symptoms.
The eradication of disease after DLI is thought to be due to an immune reaction of the graft against the tumor cells, i.e., GVL effect (Barrett, J. et al, Cur. Op. One. 8:89-95, 1996). The mechanism for the GVL effect is not as well understood. It is effected by
T-cells derived from the donor, as T-cell depleted BMT leads to higher incidences of leukemia relapse. An immune response is necessary for the effect to occur which has been experimentally demonstrated by the higher rates of relapse following syngeneic BMTs as compared to allogeneic BMTs (Duell, T., Ann. Int. Med. 126:184-192, 1997). In Japan, the high homogeneity of the population has resulted in ineffective DLI therapy since the random donors and hosts are not sufficiently allogeneic (Takahashi, K. et al, Lancet. 343:700-702, 1994).
Clinical results indicate that the GVL effect is separable from pathogenic GVHD. Patients treated with T-cell depleted allogeneic BMTs showed a higher incidence of relapse than patients which were treated with BMT and standard GVHD prophylaxis, even when controlled for the number of GVHD incidences (Horowitz, M.M. et al, Blood 75:555-562, 1990). There are also many reported cases where remission from CML was observed without the onset of GVHD (Duell, Υ., Ann. Int. Med. 126:184-192, 1997). In animal models the separation of GVHD from GVL is achievable (See e.g., Johnson, B.D. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 11 :329-336, 1993; Glass, B. et al, Br. J. Hem. 93:412- 420, 1996; Johnson, B.D. et al, Blood 85:3302-3312, 1995).
To avoid acute GVHD, several techniques have been used to purge donor T-lymphocytes or mature lymphocytes present in the BMT. However, there is currently no effective treatment of bone marrow to completely avoid GVHD, since in most cases the GVL effect is compromised, resulting in higher relapse rates (Kantarjian, H.M. et al, Blood 87:3069-3081, 1996). Some experimental approaches in humans and animal models involve the depletion of a T-cell subset, UVB irradiation (Greenfeld, J.I. et al, J. Sur. Res. 60:137-141, 1996), or T-cell depletion followed by the readdition of defined number of T-cells, titrating the absence of GVHD of defined numbers of T-cells (Drobyski, W.R. et al, Blood 82:2310-2318, 1993). In one strategy, the donor T-cells are transfected with a "suicide gene", the herpes virus thymidine kinase (HSV-tk) gene which confers sensitivity to the drug gancyclovir. If GVHD symptoms are observed, the patient is given gancyclovir to eliminate the T-cells in vivo, until the symptoms regress
(Bordignon, C. et al, Hum. Gen. Ther. 6:813-819, 1995; Bonini C. et al. Science 276:1719-1724, 1997). Another "suicide gene" approach utilizes the FAS gene encoding an apoptosis signaling protein (Ariad Pharmaceuticals). In the FAS system, a dimerizing agent such as FK1012 is used to induce FAS production which kills the donor cells that express the gene.
The "suicide gene" approach, while perhaps attractive from the point of view of eliminating unwanted T-cells after residual cancer is treated, has a number of significant disadvantages. First, GVHD symptoms are used as the signal to begin treatment with the drug. Therefore, GVHD is allowed to start and must be shut down. Second, the drug used to eliminate the T-cells must be given systemically, thereby exposing the entire body to drug for the time necessary to bring GVHD under control. Gancyclovir has toxic side effects and the HSV-tk protein is immunogenic. Additionally, because the patients need to be protected from the severe forms of GVHD, immunosuppressive prophylaxis remains an absolute requirement. Also, in some instances of chronic GVHD, the administration of gancyclovir was proven not to be fully effective (Bonini C. et al. Science 276:1719-1724,
1997). This is probably due to the caveat of this approach which is that only proliferating cells will be gancyclovir sensitive. Furthermore, even proliferating cells can escape the effect of gancyclovir through enzymatic assistance offered by neighboring normal cells present in the vicinity of the HSV-tk cells (Good Samaritan Effect).
With the FAS system, the disadvantages include the difficulty in the synthesis and the insolubility of the dimerizing agents that induce FAS production. The binding of the dimerizing agents to FKBP protein in the host may limit the available drug.
Furthermore, technical and practical concerns related to the gene therapy make the application of the technology difficult to implement and control. The production of transfected cells is plagued by low efficiency, which brings into question the homogeneity of the treated cell population and therefore the ability to completely kill the cells when GVHD signs appear. The cells must be allowed to proliferate for a period of weeks, which means that there is a delay between the time the cells are harvested and the transfected cells are ready for infusion. Finally, and most significantly, the cells transfused into humans will contain modified genetic material, which might prove to have a deleterious effect on the host in the long run. Ionizing radiation (γ-radiation or X-radiation), or UV light (UVC λ=200-280 nm;
UVB λ=280-320 nm; UVA λ=320-400 nm) have been used to treat blood products to induce DNA damage in cells. The currently accepted method for transfusion associated GVHD prevention is γ-radiation treatment (2500 cGy). The clinical dose of γ-irradiation (2500cGy) used for prevention of TA-GVHD results in a 105 to 106 fold reduction in viable T-cells. However, γ- and ionizing radiation in general, are not specific for nucleic acids. As a result of their high energy, γ-radiation and UVC also attack proteins and other cellular components, causing significant non-specific damage (Deeg, H.J. et al, Blood Cells 18:151-162, 1992). To prevent GVHD, UVB has been used to abolish rat lymphocyte proliferation while preserving BM progenitor cell and primitive hematopoietic stem cell viability for engraftment. At a UVB treatment dose of 4,000 J/cm2, CTL activity was reduced but was still present (Gowing, H. et al, Blood 87:1635-1643, 1996). However, UVB irradiation also leads to significant cell damage, especially if lamps with a broad emission spectrum are used (Gowing, H. et al, Blood 87:1635-1643, 1996; Pamphilon, A. A. et al, Blood 77:2072-2078, 1991). Surface molecule chemical modification and membrane rupture leading to lower cell viability and induction of immune responses have been reported, probably due to the ability of UVB to induce chemical changes on proteins and lipids, especially on unsaturated bonds. These limitations are due to the fact that UVB is not selective for nucleic acids only, but modifies any chemical group which absorbs between 280 and 320 nm.
UVA irradiation in the presence of the photosensitizer 8-methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), used in the treatment of human leukocytes was shown to inhibit both the stimulating ability and proliferation of peripheral blood leukocytes, in mixed lymphocyte culture reaction in vitro (Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 77:235-239, 1981; Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 76:80-87, 1981). However, UVA plus psoralen treatment, as described in these reports, has resulted in the inhibition of surface antigen expression, cytokine synthesis (IL-1, IL-6, IL-8 and TNF) and transcription of cytokine mRNA (Gruner, S. et al, Tiss. Ant. 27:147-154, 1986; Neuner, P. et al, Photochem. Photobiol.
59:182-188, 1994). Therefore, the photochemical treatment conditions described in these prior studies, while inhibiting proliferation and reducing nonspecific cell damage, also inactivated T cell immune function; these treatment conditions would not be likely to produce cells effective to provide any immune protection or to induce a GVL effect, for transfusion purposes. Finally, UVA plus 8-MOP treatment of spleen and marrow cells has been used successfully for the reduction of GVHD in a murine model (Ullrich, S.E. J. Inv. Derm. 96:303-308, 1991). As with all the previous reports, this study addressed only the GVHD aspect of the donor leukocytes and did not provide leukocytes with immune protective or GVL function. Clearly, the need exists for new approaches to suppress the induction of GVHD across allogeneic histocompatibility barriers, that do not require the systemic exposure to pharmaceuticals. Such a method should provide some immune protection to immunocompromised individuals and/or allow for killing of residual cancer, but should prevent proliferation of the infused cells in the host. The invention described and claimed herein addresses and overcomes these and other problems associated with the prior art by providing methods of preparing leukocytes that do not induce GVHD yet maintain leukocyte function. This and other advantages provided by the methods of the present invention will be apparent from the detailed description below.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides an effective method for treating leukocytes from an allogeneic donor to produce leukocytes that are unable to proliferate but maintain viability and immune function effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. Since the treated leukocytes are incapable of proliferation, they are unable to induce GVHD when introduced into an allogeneic host (in a syngeneic or autologous transfusion, GVHD is not an issue) and are therefore ideal for use in DLI for various clinical indications and especially for the treatment of cancer and to provide immune function to an immunocompromised mammal.
Various aspects of the present invention include the following:
An isolated cell population comprising a population of leukocytes wherein a portion of the leukocyte population is non-proliferating, such that the cell population is incapable of eliciting graft-versus-host disease (GVHD) in an allogeneic host; and a portion of the leukocyte population retains immunological activity, including the ability to promote destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen. Preferably, at least 90% of the leukocytes in the population are non-proliferating. The population of leukocytes of the preceding embodiments is further characterized as 1) preferably comprising T cells, NK cells and antigen presenting cells; 2) capable, upon appropriate stimulation, of synthesizing and/or secreting cytokines such as IL-2, IFN-γ, IL-10 and GM-CSF; 3) capable of expressing surface markers characteristic of T-cell activation and immune function, such as CD4, CD 8, CD 16 and CD56, among others; and 4) exhibiting an increased ratio of killer function to proliferative function, compared to untreated leukocyte populations.
The leukocyte population of the invention is, on the whole, incapable of proliferation but retains immunological activity. This leukocyte population will be capable of the following activities, among others: 1. Promoting destruction of a diseased cell, an infected cell, or a pathogen.
2. Facilitating the engraftment of a second population of cells. The second population of cells can be a suspension of cells or an organized collection of cells, such as a patch of tissue or an organ. Such cells can include, for instance, hematopoietic cells, myeloid cells, leukocytes, bone marrow cells, islet cells, hepatic cells, neuronal cells, myocardial cells, mesenchymal cells and endothelial cells.
3. Promoting immune reconstitution.
4. Immunotherapy.
5. Treatment of mixed chimerism. 6. Promoting a graft- vs. -leukemia (GVL) response. In one embodiment, the population of leukocytes is effective to promote destruction of a cancerous cell. Preferably, the cancerous cell is selected from the group consisting of Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell, Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML) cell, Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL) cell, Acute Myelogenous
Leukemia (AML) cell, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL) cell, multiple myeloma (MM) cell, Hodgkin's lymphoma cell and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cell. In preferred embodiments, the cancerous cell is a Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell or a multiple myeloma cell. In another embodiment, the population of leukocytes is effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell which is an infected cell. Infected cells include cells infected with a virus. Preferably, the virus infecting the cell is selected from the group consisting of cytomegalo virus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad) and Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus. In yet a third embodiment, the leukocyte population is effective to promote destruction of a pathogen. Pathogens include bacteria, fungi and parasites.
In still another embodiment, the leukocyte population is effective to facilitate engraftment by a second population of cells. The cells used for engraftment can be, for example, hematopoietic cells, myeloid cells, leukocytes, bone marrow cells, islet cells, hepatic cells, neuronal cells, myocardial cells, mesenchymal cells and endothelial cells. In addition, the second population of engrafted cells can comprise a solid organ or portion thereof.
Subsets of the leukocyte population described above, selected by various methods, are also provided by the invention. The subsets include lymphocytes and T-lymphocytes; and subsets can be obtained by both positive and negative selection based on, for example, surface marker expression. Preferred surface markers include CD8, CD4, CD 16 and CD56. Methods for selection of subsets of leukocyte populations from whole blood include leukophoresis and red cell removal.
In another embodiment, the invention provides a variety of therapeutic methods utilizing cell populations as described above, including donor leukocyte infusion, leukocyte add-back, immune reconstitution, adoptive immunotherapy, treatment of mixed chimerism, and methods for enhancing engraftment of a second population of transplanted cells. For use in methods for enhancing engraftment of a second population of transplanted cells, the cell populations of the invention can be introduced into the host prior to, at the same time as, or subsequent to transplantation of the second population of cells.
Also provided by the invention is a method for preparing a treated leukocyte population wherein the leukocyte population as a whole is non-proliferating and incapable of eliciting graft-versus-host disease (GVHD) in an allogeneic host, the method comprising the steps of: i) providing a sample comprising a population of leukocytes; and ii) combining the sample with a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, in an amount such that the compound forms about 1 to 104 adducts per 108 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes, thereby inhibiting proliferation but maintaining immunological activity, including the ability of the leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen. In a preferred embodiment, the compound is present in an amount effective to form from about 5 to 103 adducts per 108 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes. Preferably, the method results in proliferation being inhibited in at least 90% of the T cells within the treated leukocyte population.
Preferably, the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid further comprises a nucleic acid binding moiety capable of binding non-covalently with a nucleic acid.
In one embodiment, the compound comprises: a nucleic acid-binding moiety; a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with nucleic acid; and a frangible linker covalently linking the nucleic acid-binding moiety and the effector moiety. Preferably, the nucleic acid-binding moiety is an aromatic intercalator and the effector moiety is a mustard.
In a preferred embodiment of the method for preparing a treated leukocyte population, the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid comprises a photoactivatable moiety, which upon electromagnetic stimulation, forms a covalent bond with a nucleic acid. When using a compound having a photoactivatable moiety i.e., a photoactivatable compound, the method will further comprise the step of exposing the sample of leukocytes that have been combined with the compound to light, to photoactivate the photoactivatable moiety, thereby resulting in the photoactivatable moiety forming a covalent bond with leukocyte genomic DNA.
In one embodiment of the preceding method, the compound having a photoactivatable moiety is selected from the group consisting of furocoumarins, actinomycins, anthracyclinones, anthramycins, benzodipyrones, fluorenes, fluorenones, monostral fats blue, norphillin A, organic dyes; phenanthridines, phenazathionium salts, phenazines, phenothiazines, phenylazides, quinolines and thiaxanthenones acridines and ellipticenes. A preferred furocoumarin is a psoralen. Preferred psoralens include PAP, 8- methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), 4'-aminomethyl 4, 5', 8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT), 5-methoxy psoralen, and trioxalen 4, 5' 8-trimethylpsoralen.
Where the compound used to treat the leukocytes is psoralen, the psoralen is preferably present at a concentration in the range of 10"4 to 150 μM and the sample of leukocytes is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm, preferably between 320 and 400 nm. Preferably, the ultraviolet light is provided at a dosage of between 10" to 100 J/cm . The sample of leukocytes will be exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of 1 second to 60 minutes.
In a preferred embodiment, the method for preparing a treated leukocyte population according to the above embodiments, employs the psoralen referred to herein as S-59, having the formula:
and salts thereof. S-59
Figure imgf000012_0001
to 150 μM, even more preferably, in the range of 10" to 150 μM. The sample of leukocytes combined with S-59 is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm, preferably between 320 and 400 nm. The sample of leukocytes combined with S-59 is preferably exposed to the ultraviolet light at a dosage of between 10"3 to 100 J/cm2, more preferably, 3 J/cm2. To photoactivate the S-59, the sample of leukocytes is preferably exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of between 1 second to 60 minutes, more preferably, for 1 minute. The sample of leukocytes will preferably be provided at a cell density of 10 to 109 cells per mL, more preferably between 102 and 108 cells pre mL, most preferably at 2 x 106 cells per mL.
A leukocyte population produced according to the preceding methods, is provided, including a leukocyte population specifically treated with S-59. Yet another aspect of the invention is a method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, comprising mixing a leukocyte population produced by the aforementioned methods with a population of allogeneic cells containing the diseased cell or pathogen. The method can be performed in vitro or in vivo. In one preferred embodiment, the leukocyte population is mixed with the population of allogeneic cells of a mammalian host in vivo by donor leukocyte infusion into said host. Preferably, the donor leukocyte infusion is administered to a mammalian host suffering from relapse from leukemia or multiple myeloma post BMT.
In a preferred embodiment of the method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, the diseased cell is a cancerous cell. Cancerous cells from the following cancers are encompassed: Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell,
Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML) cell, Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL) cell, Acute Myelogenous Leukemia (AML) cell, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL) cell, multiple myeloma (MM) cell, Hodgkin's lymphoma cell and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cell. In a most preferred embodiment, the cancerous cell is a Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia cell or a multiple myeloma cell.
Another type of preferred cancerous cell is a cancerous cell selected from the group consisting of breast cancerous cell, lung cancerous cell, ovarian cancerous cell, testicular cancerous cell, prostate cancerous cell, colon cancerous cell, melanoma cell, renal carcinoma cell, neuroblastoma cell, head tumor cell and neck tumor cell. In another preferred embodiment of the method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, the diseased cell is an infected cell. Preferred infected cells encompass cells infected with a virus such as cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad) or Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus.
In yet another embodiment of the preceding method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, the leukocyte population has been stimulated with one or more epitopes of an antigen specific to the diseased cell or pathogen, to expand the number of cytotoxic T cells specific to the antigen. Stimulation or antigen-specific T cell expansion can be performed in vivo, ex vivo, or in vitro. In vivo stimulation is performed by vaccination of the leukocyte donor with an antigen specific to the diseased cell or pathogen prior to isolation of the leukocyte population from the donor. In the case where the disease is CML, the leukocyte population is preferably stimulated with a bcr-abl antigen of the CML cell. In the case of multiple myeloma, the leukocyte donor can be vaccinated with the idiotype antigen of the patient's myeloma cell.
In still another embodiment of the preceding method of promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, the leukocyte population has been stimulated with a mitogen. Stimulation is preferably conducted in vitro with a mitogenic composition such as a phorbol myristate acetate (PMA) plus ionomycin, or a phytohemagglutinin.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 shows the reduction of proliferating T-cells after PCT with various concentrations of S-59 (squares), AMT (triangles) and 8-MOP (circles) (UVA = lJ/cm2) (see Example 1).
Figure 2 shows 3H-thymidine incorporation by effector cells treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages, in a MLR assay (see Example 2).
Figure 3 shows the level of IL-2 production in a MLR by effector cells photochemically treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages (see Example 2).
Figure 4 shows the level of IFN-γ production in a MLR by effector cells photochemically treated with S-59 at the various drug dosages (see Example 2).
Figure 5 shows the levels of IL-8 generated after PCT of leukocytes in PC with different concentrations of S-59 and 0.5 J/cm UVA, as a function of time after PCT (see Example 2)
Figure 6 shows the levels of CD69 marker expression after PCT with different doses of AMT and 1 J/cm2 UVA, as a function of time after treatment (see Example 3)
Figure 7 shows psoralen-DNA adduct formation following photochemical treatment with various psoralens in PC. S-59 (squares); AMT (triangle); 8-MOP (circles); 1.9 J/cm2 UVA (see Example 3). Figure 8 shows the effects of S-59 + UVA treatment on proliferation of treated cells, measured by H thymidine incorporation in a MLR assay. NR denotes untreated cells; UV denotes cells irradiated with UVA in the absence of S-59. Also shown are the results obtained when cells were irradiated with 3 J/cm2 UVA in the presence of three different concentrations of S-59. See Example 14 for details.
Figure 9 shows the effects of S-59 + UVA treatment on proliferation of treated cells, measured after activation of treated cells with anti-CD3 antibody. See Example 14 for details.
Figure 10A shows production of IL-2 by human PBMC that have been photochemically treated with S-59 + UVA and stimulated in a MLR. Measurements are by sandwich ELISA. See Example 14 for details.
Figure 10B shows production of IFN-γ by human PBMC that have been photochemically treated with S-59 + UVA and stimulated in a MLR. Measurements are by sandwich ELISA.
Figure 11 A shows CD69 expression in treated and control cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
Figure 11B shows CD25 expression in treated and control cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
Figure 12 shows CD40L expression in treated and control untreated cells measured at different times (hours) after activation by anti-CD3.
Figure 13 shows cytotoxic T-cell activity of photochemically-treated, activated leukocytes, measured by 51Cr release from target cells that were co-incubated with the treated leukocytes. E:T represents effector cell to target cell ratio.
Figure 14 shows measurements of average body weight in irradiated mice which received a MHC-mismatched bone marrow transplant along with S-59 + UVA-treated splenocytes, and were then challenged with leukemia cells three days after transplant. Splenocytes were exposed to UVA in the presence of 0.01 μM S-59 for different amounts of time, as indicated in the figure. Figure 15 shows analysis of GVL activity in leukemia-challenged mice, which received bone marrow transplants with or without infusion of treated leukocytes. GVL activity is demonstrated by percent leukemia-free survival (survival ratios given in parentheses)..
Figure 16 shows analysis of proliferative ability of S-303-treated responder cells, measured by H-thymidine incorporation between 6 and 7 days after co-culture with gamma-inactivated allogeneic stimulator cells in a MLR.
Figure 17 shows levels of IFN-γ in MLR supernatants in which the responder cells were treated with different concentrations of S -303 prior to co-culture.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used: BMT: bone marrow transplantation DLI: donor leukocyte infusion LDA: limiting dilution analysis MLR: mixed lymphocyte reaction
PA: photochemically arrested; PCT: photochemical treatment; PI-DLI: Photochemically inactivated donor leukocyte infusions; PUVA: Psoralen and ultraviolet A radiation. PAP: 4'- and 5 '-primary amino-substituted psoralen S-59: a primary amino-substituted psoralen having the following formula:
Figure imgf000016_0001
PBSC: peripheral blood stem cell PC: platelet concentrate
TA-GVHD: transfusion associated graft-versus-host -disease PHA: phytohemagglutinin
Definitions
"Allogeneic" refers to the relationship that exists between genetically nonidentical members of the same species, i.e., the members are not syngeneic.
"Host" is used interchangeably with "recipient" and refers to a mammalian recipient of allogeneic donor leukocytes. Generally, the host will be a human but other mammals such as mice, dogs, cats, monkeys, horses, etc. are encompassed.
A "leukocyte" refers to any white blood cell including the lineage progenitor cells. "Antigen presenting cells" include macrophages, and dendritic cells which are present in low numbers in peripheral blood, as well as their respective precursor cells. Leukocytes are present in circulating blood and in bone marrow as well as in the myelopoietic, lymphoid and reticular sites of the reticuloendothelial system.
A "leukocyte population" as used herein refers to a population of leukocytes that contains more than one leukocyte cell type and will include at least T cells, antigen presenting cells and NK cells.
"Donor leukocytes" refer to leukocytes that are not endogenous to the host animal but are derived from an allogeneic donor. For in vitro and non-human applications, the leukocyte population and donor leukocytes can be from a mammal including rodents, rabbits, dogs, etc.
By "purified" is meant that the leukocyte population has been isolated from the body and processed to be substantially free from non-leukocyte cell types and preferably from other contaminants such as cellular debris that are present in the source of the leukocytes, the source generally being peripheral blood, bone marrow or even splenocytes. Preferably, the leukocyte population is purified such that it contains less than 13% red blood cells (RBC), more preferably less than 5% , even more preferably, less than 1%. In a most preferred embodiment, the hematocrit level is less than 0.5%. Methods for purification of leukocytes are described below.
"Treated leukocytes" refers to leukocytes that have been exposed to or contacted with a compound capable of forming one or more covalent bonds with nucleic acid. The leukocytes can be "treated" by PCT or with an alkylator compound. "Photochemically inactivated" or "photochemically arrested" (PA) or "PCT-arrested" leukocytes refers to PCT leukocytes that are incapable of proliferation even upon stimulation, and does not imply that the leukocytes are inactivated in protein expression and immune function.
A population of leukocytes of the invention contains but is not limited to cells that are "non-proliferating". Cells are "non-proliferating" if they are arrested in DNA replication and are thus, unable to divide to generate new cells even upon stimulation with reagents such as mitogens, cytokines, antigens, antibodies or other proliferation stimuli. It is not essential that the methods of the present invention result in replication arrest of every leukocyte in the preparation. For the purpose of this invention, it is adequate that the leukocyte population is arrested in proliferation in at least 90%, more preferably in at least 95%) of the leukocytes within the purified population, provided that the small fraction of leukocytes capable of proliferation is insufficient to cause GVHD in an allogeneic host. In a most preferred embodiment, 99% or more of the leukocytes within the population are non-proliferating. Proliferation activity can be assayed, e.g., by limiting dilution assay (LDA), or by H-thymidine incorporation separately, or as part of a MLR assay as described in the Examples below. In the most preferred embodiment, T-cells in the population are proliferation inhibited to the limit of detection by LDA. The results of these assays have been shown to be predictive of the ability of the treated leukocytes to proliferate in vivo.
"Graft-versus-host disease" or "GVHD" results from clonal expansion of donor T- cells present in the transfused BMT or DLI, proliferating and colonizing host tissues. The occurrence and severity of GVHD has been shown to be associated with the presence of clonable T-cells, (see Kernan, N.A. et al, Blood 68:770-773, 1986). In patients who are HLA-matched with their donors, the occurrence of GVHD is attributed to minor histocompatibility antigens. GVHD onset is due to the absence of immune function in immunosuppressed patients, a conditioning necessary for the BMT to be successful. The donor T-cells are able to proliferate unchallenged in that environment and attack host tissues, causing the pathological symptoms. At the cellular level, antigen-presenting-cells of the host interact with the T-cells of the donor in the context of the major histocompatibility complexes (MHC) I and II and induce their activation against cells bearing host-specific (minor) antigens. This leads to clonal proliferation of the activated
T-cells, which attack the host tissues and release cytokines. Cytokines secreted by the T-cells also activate a variety of other effector cells of the host which adds to the tissue damage through the additional generation of cytokines (cytokine storm). See e.g., Burakoff, S.J. et al, Graft- Versus-Host Disease Immunology, Pathophysiology, and Treatment, in Brinkhous KMS, S.A. (ed): Hematology, vol. 12 (ed 1st). New York, Marcell Dekker, Inc., 1990, p 725. Burakoff, S.J. et al, Graft-Versus-Host Disease Immunology, Pathophysiology, and Treatment, in Brinkhous KMS, S.A. (ed): Hematology, vol. 12 (ed 1st). New York, Marcell Dekker, Inc., 1990, p. 725.
When GVHD is diagnosed, the patient is usually given a high dose of immunosuppressive drugs to suppress the GVHD. However, these drugs also render the graft leukocytes ineffective in GVL and the patient may relapse into leukemia.
The capability of a leukocyte population to elicit GVHD can be determined in vivo, e.g., as described in Example 4 below, or in vitro by limiting dilution assay (LDA), or by
MLR, as described in Example 5 below. The leukocyte population is judged incapable of eliciting GVHD if the number of clonable T cells in the population, as assayed by LDA, is within about 10"3 to 10"4 of that present in the untreated leukocyte control population (positive control for GVHD and proliferation). In vivo, lack of clinical symptoms of GVHD (symptoms described in Example 4) in an allogeneic recipient of the leukocyte population indicates incapability of the population to elicit GVHD
A leukocyte population is considered "effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen" if it includes leukocytes that are able to participate, directly or indirectly, in immune responses that are effective to kill or clear the targeted diseased cell or pathogen from the body, or to limit the proliferation of the diseased cell or pathogen.
Not every leukocyte present in the leukocyte population has to be able to promote destruction but the population as a whole should be effective in that regard.
It should be recognized that the diseased cell or pathogen can be destroyed via any mechanism. It is not the intention of the invention to have the methods of treating leukocytes be limited by particular mechanisms by which the treated leukocytes can mediate destruction. The diseased cell may be destroyed by cytolysis by T or NK cells, but can also be killed by other mechanisms such as by being induced to undergo apoptosis. The diseased cell or pathogen can also be destroyed by antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC), by phagocytosis by macrophages, or be cleared by the reticuloendothelial system via any immune mechanism naturally existing in a mammal. A pathogen that resides inside a host cell can be destroyed indirectly by killing the host cell upon which it depends for its survival. Mechanisms by which the immune system rids the body of malignant cells, infected cells or pathogens are discussed in standard immunology textbooks, e.g., in Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Daniel P. Stites, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G. Parslow (eds.), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT, 1994. The "effective" treated donor leukocyte can be an effector cell such as a cytotoxic T cell (CTL), a NK cell, or a macrophage that directly kills a target diseased cell or pathogen, or that induces the diseased cell to undergo apoptosis. Alternatively, the treated donor leukocyte can mediate destruction by stimulating other leukocytes, e.g., the leukocytes from a transplanted bone marrow, a previous DLI, or the host's own leukocytes, to perform the killing or clearance. Stimulation of other leukocytes can be by surface antigen expression, cytokine secretion or any appropriate mechanism. Cytolysis can occur via MHC -restricted and/or non-MHC restricted (such as by NK cells) mechanisms.
The effectiveness of a leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen can be measured by various assays, such as by MLR or by 51Cr release assay as described below in the Examples. Cytolytic effectiveness is demonstrated, e.g., by the ability to mediate killing of a leukemic cell in a 51Cr release assay. For the purposes of this invention, a leukocyte population is considered effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell if, in an appropriate assay (e.g., the 51Cr release assay), the population exhibits cytolytic activity at a level of at least about 20% above that of the negative control population. The types of diseased cells and pathogens targeted for killing are provided below. Generally, effectiveness to promote destruction will require that the population of leukocytes maintains a level of protein synthesis to allow production and secretion of proteins including signal transduction molecules such as cytokines. Preferably, there is also expression of surface antigens including receptors, adhesion molecules and co- stimulatory molecules on the plasma membrane. Cell viability and membrane integrity are critical for mediating GVL effect. "Cell viability" is defined herein as survival in circulation i.e., in the blood stream and other tissues.
While some cytokine production may be inhibited, preferably cytokine production is maintained at least 70%, more preferably at 80%, even more preferably greater than 90%, and most preferably greater than 95%, of the level before treatment with the aforementioned compound. Preferably, the leukocyte population includes leukocytes able to secrete at least interleukin-2 (IL-2) and interferon-γ (IFN-γ) under stimulation. These cytokines are relevant because of their established role in T-cell activation and GVHD/GVL. Other relevant cytokines include granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor (GM-CSF) and interleukin- 10 (IL-10). Secretion of cytokines can be readily assayed e.g., by using cytokine assay kits (e.g. kits from R&D Systems) as described in the Examples section below.
The surface antigens (also referred to as surface markers) expressed on the leukocytes in the purified leukocyte population will depend on the specific cell type.
Preferably, the population will include leukocytes expressing the following surface antigens which are known to be involved in interactions associated with T-cell and NK cell activation and immune function: CD2, CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD18, CD25, CD69 (lymphocyte activation marker) and CD16/CD56, antigens. Preferably, the leukocytes will also express other surface markers including MHC Class I and Class II,
CD8, CD4, CD3/TcR (T cell receptor), adhesion molecules such as CD54 (ICAM -1), LFA-1 and VLA-4, and other co-stimulatory molecules. The expression of surface antigen can be detected and measured by various assays such as by staining cells with antibodies specific to the particular antigen and detecting the antibodies which have been labeled directly or indirectly, by standard FACS-SCAN analysis. Other methods known in the art include immunoprecipitation of surface antigens and immunoblotting.
"Diseased cell" as used herein, refers to a cancerous cell, an infected cell, or a cell in any type of pathological state, which may be present in vivo or in vitro. The cancerous or malignant cell can be from any type of cancer, of any tissue or cell type origin. Such malignant or cancerous cells include but are not limited to cells of the following malignancies: Leukemia including Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML), Chronic Lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), Acute Myelogenous Leukemia (AML), and Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL); Multiple myeloma (MM); Non-Hodgkin lymphoma and Hodgkin's disease (lymphoma); solid tumors, including breast, lung, ovarian and testicular cancers, prostate cancer, colon cancer, melanoma, renal carcinoma cell, neuroblastoma, and head and neck tumors. Infected cell encompasses cells infected by any of the following: a virus, a bacterium, a fungus, a parasite or any other pathogenic microorganism.
"Pathogen" is defined as any agent containing nucleic acid and capable of causing disease in a human, other mammals, or vertebrates. Examples of pathogens are bacteria, viruses, protozoa, fungi, yeasts, molds, and mycoplasmas which cause disease in humans, other mammals, or vertebrates. The genetic material of the pathogen may be DNA or RNA, and the genetic material may be present as single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid. The pathogen can be outside a cell or residing inside a cell as exemplified by HIV in a macrophage.
The terms donor leukocyte "infusion" and "transfusion" are used interchangeably herein and refer to the same procedure. "Light dose or dosage" or "PCT dose", as measured in units of J/cm2 refers to the total light energy per unit area that a sample of leukocytes receives during PCT. Light dosage can be altered by varying the intensity of light and time of exposure of the cell sample to the light.
"Intensity" of light as measured in units of mW/cm2 refers to the energy of light received per unit of the sample, per second.
A "photoactivatable moiety" is defined herein as a moiety which undergoes a chemical change in response to electromagnetic radiation. When the compound including the photoactivatable moiety is photoactivated by electromagnetic radiation, the photoactivated moiety forms a covalent bond with a nucleic acid to form a compound: nucleic acid complex, referred to herein as an "adduct".
"Aromatic intercalator" refers to a compound or region thereof having aromatic ring structure, that can intercalate nucleic acids. Aromatic intercalators include but are not limited to, anthracene, acridine, napthalene, napthoic acid, etc.
An "isolated population of cells," as used herein, comprises a population of cells existing outside of the organism in which the cells normally reside.
"Immunological activity" as used herein, refers to functions expressed by cells of the immune system, such as T-cells, B-cells, NK cells, antigen-presenting cells (APCs) and others, such functions including, but not limited to, synthesis and secretion of cytokines, cell-mediated cytotoxicity, synthesis and secretion of antibodies, processing and presentation of antigens and antigen fragments, and expression of surface markers characteristic of immune cells.
Incorporation by Reference
References cited within this application, including patents, published patent applications and other publications, are hereby incorporated by reference. Description of Preferred Embodiments
Various preferred aspects of the present invention are summarized below and further described and illustrated in the subsequent detailed descriptions and examples. The present invention provides a method of treating a population of isolated leukocytes so as to render a portion of the population non-proliferating to the extent that the population causes minimal GVHD while still retaining sufficient immune function effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. By "minimal GVHD" is meant that the extent of the GVHD is insufficient to result in mortality of the mammal or to abolish the ability of the leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen and/or to mediate GVL effect.
GVHD is clearly associated with the clonal expansion of the donor T-cells and, in principle, any treatment which removes, inactivates or kills leukocytes would be effective against it. GVL, on the other hand, is associated with an immune response of the donor leukocytes and may be the result of cytolytic action, presentation of antigens, synthesis of specific cytokines or a combination of the above. This necessitates some of the functions of the donor leukocytes to be intact for a GVL effect to be observed. The inactivation of donor leukocyte function in efforts to avoid GVHD also renders the donor BM or leukocytes ineffective in providing necessary immune functions to an immunocompromised or BMT host.
In order for a treatment to be able to eliminate GVHD but still provide immune protection and/or induce a GVL effect in an allogeneic host, the proliferating ability of leukocytes must be selectively removed, while retaining some level of leukocyte function. The invention provides populations of leukocytes with these characteristics. The isolated population of leukocytes of the present invention provide various advantages over those previously described and used. One significant benefit is that eliminating the onset of GVHD will allow the safe infusion of donor leukocytes into patients. As a result, the host, who is lacking an immune system or has a chimeric immune system, can receive either a larger dose of treated donor leukocytes and/or multiple DLIs, thus enhancing the efficacy of treatment of the disease. Previously, the threat of GVHD limited the number of leukocytes infused.
The population of non-proliferating leukocytes is effective to provide the host with sufficient immune defense to combat cancer and infections. Such leukocytes are useful for treating relapsing hematological malignancies such as chronic myelogenous, acute myelogenous, acute lympholytic, multiple myeloma and other forms of leukemia and myeloma, as part of post-BMT treatment or as an alternative to BMT. A GVL effect from the DLI is useful not only to remove minimal residual disease but can also be applied to the treatment of a higher malignant cell load, especially since absence of leukocyte expansion allows for the safe infusion of greater numbers of cells. The treated leukocyte populations of the invention are also useful for the treatment of certain solid tumors (e.g. , breast cancer and renal cell carcinoma) that are susceptible to immunomodulatory therapy and in preventing graft rejection in both matched and mismatched allo BMT procedures. Various other clinical indications for which the present treated leukocytes can be applied in treatment are described in detail below.
The method of treating leukocytes of the invention involves the following. Leukocytes can be obtained from bone marrow, cord blood or whole blood. The most convenient source of leukocytes is peripheral blood. Methods of isolating leukocytes from other sources are described in the scientific literature. Whole blood is processed to purify and enrich for leukocytes by, for example, red cell removal or leukophoresis. The resultant purified population of leukocytes is about 99% free of red blood cells which are of different size and density compared to leukocytes and are readily removed by these processes. The population of leukocytes is then mixed with a compound, and treated under conditions that are effective to arrest proliferation of the leukocytes without compromising cell viability and integrity. Unreacted compound can be removed, or the compound may become inactive with time, so that removal is not necessary. In a preferred embodiment, "compound" will refer to a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid. Covalent bond formation may form about from 1 to 104 adducts, preferably from 5 to 10 adducts, most preferably 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA. It is important that the treatment conditions minimize nonspecific damage to proteins and other cellular components and avoid membrane damage. Membrane integrity of the majority of treated leukocytes is necessary for a GVL effect to take place. These treatment conditions will also be effective to render the treated leukocytes incapable of eliciting
GVHD if introduced into an allogeneic host, or non-responsive in an MLR assay in vitro. In addition, the treated leukocytes should maintain protein expression effective to accomplish immune function, specifically to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen either in vivo or in vitro.
Properties of suitable compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, preferably double stranded DNA, are disclosed below. The compounds may include a moiety capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid which is photoactivatable or chemically reactive. The compound inhibits proliferation of cells by forming covalent bonds with the genomic DNA, thus interfering with the function of DNA polymerases and rendering the leukocytes non-proliferating.
The number of covalent adducts that the compound forms with leukocyte nucleic acid can be modulated so that the compound inhibits proliferation but maintains immune functions effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. With alkylator compounds, the effect can be modulated by adjusting the concentration of the compound and the length of time the leukocytes are contacted with the compound before removing unbound compound. The concentration required will depend on the characteristics of the particular compound, such as its solubility in aqueous solution and the DNA binding constant. The compound will typically be used at concentrations effective to generate about 1 to 104 adducts of the covalent binding compound per 108 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA, preferably about 5 to 103 adducts, even more preferably, about 102 to 103 adducts. Ideally, the conditions for treating the leukocyte population will generate about 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of genomic DNA. The lowest concentration of compound effective to achieve the leukocyte compositions of the present invention is the preferred concentration.
With photoactivatable compounds, the PCT effect can be modulated by adjusting the concentration of the compound, the wavelength of light, and the length of time of exposure to that light. The conditions for PCT using psoralen and other photoactivatable compounds are described in detail below.
Treatment conditions will be targeted to generate about 1 to 10 adducts of the covalent binding compound, per 10 base pairs of leukocyte genomic DNA, preferably about 5 to 104 adducts, even more preferably, about 10 to 10 adducts. Ideally, the treatment conditions will generate about 10 adducts per 10 base pairs of genomic DNA.
The number of compound-DNA adducts resulting from treatment can be measured e.g., by using radiolabeled DNA binding compound as described in the Examples below. Another type of compound that can be used in the treatment of leukocytes is a small molecule that acts as an inhibitor of DNA replication. Such small molecule replication inhibitors can optionally comprise a linker (frangible or otherwise) and an effector, as described above. Any of the steps of DNA replication can serve as a target for inhibition, including formation of an origin recognition complex (ORC), recruitment of the
ORC to the origin, initiation of replication, elongation, etc. In addition, inhibitors of enzymes that facilitate the process of replication, such as helicases and topoisomerases, are useful. Examples of topoisomerase inhibitors include, for instance, camptothecin and daunomycin. To combine the sample of leukocytes with a compound, the compounds of the present invention may be introduced into a suspension of leukocytes (leukocyte sample) in several forms. The compounds may be introduced as an aqueous solution in water, saline, a synthetic media such as "Sterilyte™ 3.0", or in the solution that the leukocytes are suspended in. Solutions (infusion grade and non-infusion grade) appropriate for resuspending the leukocytes are provided below. "Synthetic media" is herein defined as an aqueous synthetic blood or blood product storage media. The compounds can further be provided as dry formulations, with or without adjuvants. The cell suspension is then agitated to mix in the compound.
The leukocytes to be treated with compound are resuspended in physiologically balanced solution such as plasma, synthetic media or a combination thereof. The leukocytes can be provided at a volume of from 200 mL to 1 liter. The leukocytes for treatment will preferably be contained in a reaction vessel such as a blood bag. Blood bags are known in the art.
The effect of treatment with the compound on the viability and function of the leukocyte population can be monitored by in vitro as well as in vivo assays to determine the optimum treatment conditions that minimize proliferation and GVHD activity while maximizing cytotoxic function and/or the GVL effect. Optimum conditions will vary with the properties of the compound used and will be validated for the disease or pathogen. In the case of photoactivatable compounds, the most preferred PCT condition will comprise the lowest concentration of compound and the lowest light dosage found sufficient for providing a population of leukocytes that is arrested in proliferation but effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. The population of treated leukocytes will be characterized as follows. The cell viability of the population of treated leukocytes will be assessed. Cell viability can be measured in vivo, for example, by PCR analysis to detect sequences specific to donor leukocytes, as described in the Examples section below. Preferably, the population of leukocytes will have a cell viability of at least 3 weeks. Fast clearance of leukocytes upon treatment may affect their ability to induce an antileukemic response.
Membrane integrity of the treated leukocytes is also necessary for a GVL effect to take place. Membrane integrity can be determined by trypan blue or propidium iodide dye exclusion. The PCT procedure, if used, is optimized for the light dose and/or the concentration of the compound which will maximize the number of leukocytes with intact membranes.
Proliferation activity can be measured, e.g., by Limiting Dilution Assay (LDA) or Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) Assay, as described in the Examples below. The activity of the leukocytes in a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) assay will be predictive of the ability of the treated leukocytes to mediate GVHD in vivo. Alternatively, GVHD can be measured by monitoring GVHD symptoms and/or morbidity and mortality induced by GVHD in MHC matched animals transfused with the treated leukocytes.
Leukocyte activity can be determined by monitoring cytokine synthesis, expression of surface antigenic markers and ability to lyse target cells. Expression of surface antigenic markers is determined through the use of the appropriate antigen-specific antibodies and standard FACS-SCAN analysis. The presence of antigenic markers, CD2,
CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD 18, CD25, CD69 (lymphocyte activation marker) and CD16/CD56, which are known to be involved in interactions associated with T-cell and NK cell activation and immune function, will be determined as a function of concentration of the covalent bonding compound and, if used, the PCT light dose. Stability of surface molecules under the PCT conditions is not expected to be influenced given the mild nature of PCT on proteins. Treatment conditions, for example, PCT, will be chosen such that they do not adversely affect the expression of the surface molecules or reduce cytokine production below desired levels (preferred levels disclosed above).
Cytolytic activity indicative of GVL activity can be measured, e.g., by lysis of human or mouse leukemia cell lines in a 51Cr release assay. The anti-leukemia effect can be assayed in vitro as described in Choudhury et al. Blood 89:1133-1142, 1997, or in vivo as described in Johnson et al. Blood 85:3302-3312, 1995. Activity against solid tumors can be tested, e.g., using murine models of solid tumors. The ability to mediate lysis of an infected cell or a pathogen can be assayed using infected animals in an animal model. GVHD and GVL capabilities can also be measured in vivo as described in Examples 4 and 5 below.
All the above assays are described in the Examples below. Experiments performed using murine models are predictive of the human response because of the similarities in immune responses between mouse and human. The GVL effect for example, is well documented in both murine and human systems. The results of these assays are predictive of the biological responses in vivo, in the DLI treated host.
From the results of tests in animal models, the concentrations of compound determined to be effective will be tested on a representative number of patients and the most effective concentration of compound that results in alleviation of the patient's disease will be used. Conditions which work for the majority of patients will be most preferred. The patients will generally be post BM transplant patients.
From the results of such assays and tests, it will be possible to determine optimum treatment conditions that will generate a population of leukocytes that are incapable of proliferation and GVHD but effective to promote destruction of a diseased cell or pathogen. The treated leukocyte population should have GVL activity.
Selection of leukocyte donor For DLI, the donor has to be allogeneic with respect to the host (recipient) of the leukocyte infusion. HLA-A and -B are HLA I genes and HLA-DR is a HLA II gene. Each of these genes exist in multiple different alleleic forms. Since each individual inherits 2 copies of chromosome 6 (containing HLA genes), the individual can express up to 6 different HLA-A, -B and -DR proteins (products of 2 different alleles at each locus). Preferably, the allogeneic donor is identical genotypically in 3 or more of the 6 HLA loci of HLA-A, B, and DR. In "haploidentical" transplantation, the donor and host are matched in 3 of the 6 HLA loci. Ideally, the donor and recipient are identical for HLA-A, B and DRB 1. Unrelated HLA-matched donors can be searched through the U.S. National Marrow Donor Program (NMPD). Currently, for patients up to the age of 55 years who receive unmodified non-T cell depleted graft, the patient's and donor's HLA-A, B and DRB1 genes have to be identical. A patient who is 36 years of age or younger may be transplanted from a donor who differs by no more than one minor antigen mismatch for HLA-A, -B or -DR. An HLA-A or B minor mismatch is defined as 2 antigens that belong to the same cross reactive group. An HLA-DR minor mismatch is defined as two haplotypes that express the same DR specificity but differ for DRB1 alleles. For criteria for suitable allogeneic donors, see O'Reilly, R. et al. Allogeneic Marrow Transplants: Approaches For The Patient Lacking A Donor, in Hematology- 1996, The Education Program of the American Society of
Hematology, pp. 132-146.
Preparation of leukocytes
The starting material for the leukocyte populations of the present invention can be provided, for example, by regional blood processing service centers similar to those currently in existence for the processing of peripheral blood stem cells, as well as other sources of hematopoietic stem cells, such as bone marrow. Leukocytes from the donor can be apheresed (apheresis can be done at a variety of facilities including the local blood center or hospital blood bank) and treated at any appropriate facility equipped to perform the treatment. Alternatively, apheresed leukocytes can be shipped overnight to a Good
Manufacturing Practice (GMP) cell processing facility for treatment and quality assurance testing. The treated leukocytes for DLI can then be sent by same day delivery to the patient's hospital for administration to the patient. Alternatively, the treated leukocytes can be cryopreserved using methods known in the art such as by control rate freezing in 10%) DMSO and storage in liquid nitrogen (see Russel et al. Bone Marrow Transpl. 19:861-866,
1997). When needed for transfusion, the frozen leukocytes will be thawed and washed to remove the DMSO.
One conventional method for the preparation of purified leukocytes involves isolation from whole blood by density gradient centrifugation. This typically involves the isolation of T cell-enriched white blood cells by centrifugation through a Ficoll gradient.
See e.g. Longley and Stewart, J. Immunol. Methods, 121, 33-38, 1989. This procedure is carried out as follows: (1) freshly drawn blood samples (e.g. 50 - 200 milliliters) are layered over Ficoll carefully so that the interface is undisturbed; (2) the leukocytes are collected (after centrifugation) by removing the opaque band of cells located at the gradient interface and, (3) the collected cells are washed free of Ficoll. The red blood cells and granulocytes pellet in this system. To remove Ficoll, the cells are usually washed one or more times by centrifuging and removing the supernatant. This procedure yields a purified leukocyte preparation, i.e. a preparation that is substantially free of red blood cells.
Automated methods exist for preparing large preparations of leukocytes. For example, the present invention contemplates processing blood as done by a leukophoresis machine (e.g., COBE Spectra Apheresis System, COBE BCT, Inc. Lakewood, CO) according to the manufacturer's directions. Preferably, an apheresis machine that provides a leukocyte preparation with the lowest percentage hematocrit is used. After leukophoresis, the leukocyte preparation can then be washed and diluted with the appropriate solution (plasma, infusion grade solution, etc. as described above) to achieve a final hematocrit of less than 0.5%. Percoll separation can be applied as a further purification step if the above procedure was insufficient to reduce the hematocrit levels. As an alternative to leukophoresis, red cell removal methods are well-known to those of skill in the art.
If leukocyte populations containing only substantially T cells and NK cells or other combination of leukocytes are desired, selected cell subsets can be isolated from the leukocyte preparation, e.g., by using fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) using positive and/or negative selection with the appropriate antibodies that identify specific cell surface markers. Examples of surface markers that can be used for selection include, but are not limited to, CD4, CD8, CD16 and CD56. Such cell separation procedures are well known in the art, see, e.g. Ed Harlow and David Lane, Antibodies A laboratory Manual,
Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, New York, 1988.
Purified leukocyte populations are suspended in the appropriate solution as disclosed above. The purified leukocyte populations can be treated immediately or cryopreserved for later treatment. In preparation for proliferation inactivation, the purified, mixed leukocyte preparation is resuspended in an isotonic solution such as plasma, synthetic media, or a combination of the two. The purified leukocyte population will generally be prepared at a cell density of 10 to 109 cells per ml, preferably 104 to 107 cells/ml, ideally 2 x 106 cells/ml.
The invention contemplates various scenarios for the preparation and administration or use of the treated leukocytes. The peripheral blood (or alternative leukocyte source including bone marrow or cord blood) can be collected and frozen until ready for proliferation inactivation treatment at which time the cells are thawed and washed free of the cryopreservative, optionally processed to obtain purified leukocyte preparations, and subjected to treatment. The treated leukocyte populations can subsequently be used to infuse a patient. The following alternative scenarios are also possible: i) collection of peripheral blood, processing, leukocyte treatment, and infusion; ii) collection, processing, leukocyte treatment, freezing of treated cells, washing off of cryopreservative, and infusion; iii) vaccination of donor (one or more times) with a target antigen to expand antigen-specific T cells, collection of peripheral blood from vaccinated donor, processing, treatment, and infusion; iv) in vitro sensitization of donor leukocytes with a target antigen to expand antigen-specific T cells, leukocyte treatment, and infusion.
Compounds
In one embodiment of the invention, compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid are suitable for the purposes of achieving the leukocyte population of the present invention. These compounds preferably include a moiety which binds non-covalently with a nucleic acid, as well as the same or different moiety which is capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid. The compound will preferably have the following properties: i) high binding affinity for nucleic acid; ii) solubility in aqueous solution; and iii) ability to penetrate the leukocyte membrane. Moieties capable of forming a covalent bond with nucleic acid include chemically reactive moieties, which do not require an outside stimulation in order to be activated and react with a nucleic acid, and photoactivatable moieties, which react with nucleic acids only after stimulus in the form of electromagnetic radiation.
As used herein, the term "alkylator compound" refers to a compound including at least one chemically reactive moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, in the absence of an external stimulus, such as light stimulation. The compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid further may be photoactivatable. The "photoactivatable compound", as defined herein, includes a moiety which is capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid upon photoactivation by stimulus of light of a certain wavelength.
Preferably, the compound includes both a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, and a moiety capable of binding non-covalently with a nucleic acid. Within the scope of the invention, the moiety which is capable of binding with a nucleic acid also may serve as the moiety which is capable of covalently reacting with the nucleic acid, and may be, for example, photoactivatable. In one embodiment, the alkylator compound comprises: a nucleic acid binding moiety; a moiety capable of reacting to form a covalent bond with nucleic acid ("referred to herein as an effector moiety"); and a frangible linker covalently linking the nucleic acid moiety and the effector moiety. In a preferred embodiment, in aqueous solution, at appropriate pH values, these compounds have a period of activity during which they can bind to and react with nucleic acid. After this period, the compounds break down to products which are no longer able to bind well to nor react with nucleic acid.
The chemical organization of these alkylator compounds can be broadly described as an anchor, covalently bonded to a frangible linker, which is covalently bonded to an effector. "Anchor", also referred to as "nucleic acid binding moiety" is defined as a moiety which binds non-covalently to a nucleic acid biopolymer (DNA, RNA, or synthetic analogues thereof). "Effector" or "Effector moiety" is defined as a moiety which reacts with nucleic acid by a mechanism which forms a covalent bond with the nucleic acid. "Frangible linker" is defined as a moiety which serves to covalently link the anchor and effector, and which will degrade under certain conditions so that the anchor and effector are no longer linked covalently. The anchor-frangible linker-effector arrangement enables the compounds to bind specifically to nucleic acid (due to the anchor's binding ability). This brings the effector into proximity for reaction with the nucleic acid.
Preferably, the nucleic acid binding moiety is selected from the group consisting of aromatic intercalators, acridines, acridine derivatives, ellipticenes, 2- polyamines, groove binders, and hydrophobic or shape selective binders. In preferred embodiments, the frangible linker comprises a functional unit selected from the group consisting of forward esters, reverse esters, forward thioesters, reverse thioesters, forward and reverse thionoesters, forward and reverse dithioic acids, sulfates, forward and reverse sulfonates, phosphates, and forward and reverse phosphonate groups. The effector moiety preferably comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting of mustard groups, mustard group equivalents, epoxides, aldehydes, and formaldehyde synthons.
When the alkylator compound is combined with a leukocyte composition at physiological pH, to form a reaction mixture, the effector portion of the compound reacts with nucleic acid present with which it comes into contact. Effector moieties which do not react with nucleic acid are gradually hydrolyzed by the solvent. Hydrolysis of the frangible linker occurs concurrently with the effector-nucleic acid reaction and effector hydrolysis. It is desirable that the frangible linker break down at a rate slow enough to permit inactivation of leukocyte proliferation; that is, the rate of breakdown of the frangible linker is slower than the rate at which the compound reacts with leukocyte nucleic acid. After a sufficient amount of time has passed, the compound has broken down into the anchor (which may also bear fragments of the frangible linker) and the effector- nucleic acid breakdown products (where fragments of the frangible linker may also remain attached to the effector), or into the anchor (which may also bear fragments of the frangible linker) and the hydrolyzed effector breakdown products (where fragments of the frangible linker may also remain attached to the effector). Additional fragments of the frangible linker may also be generated upon degradation of the compound which do not remain bonded to either the anchor or the effector. The exact embodiment of the alkylator compound of the invention determines whether the anchor breakdown product or the effector breakdown product bears fragments of the frangible linker, or whether additional fragments of the frangible linker are generated which do not remain bonded to either the anchor or the effector breakdown products. Preferred alkylator compounds are compounds which, upon cleavage of the frangible linker, result in breakdown products of low mutagenicity. Mutagenicity of the compounds, after hydrolysis of the effector, is due primarily to the anchor moiety, as the anchor interacts with nucleic acid and may have the potential to interfere with nucleic acid replication, even if the effector moiety has been hydrolyzed. After cleavage of the frangible linker, the anchor fragment has substantially reduced mutagenicity.
In additional embodiments of the invention, the compound capable of forming a covalent bond with nucleic acid is removed from the reaction mixture after a certain period of time. The optimal reaction time can be determined empirically, as described infra in the Examples. Procedures and compositions for removal of compounds from the reaction mixture are provided in co-owned U.S. Patent Applications Serial Nos. 08/779,830;
08/779,885; and 09/003,113; and in co-owned U.S. Patent Applications Attorney Docket Nos. 28217-20004.21 and 28217-20004.22, both filed July 8, 1998. The disclosures of all of the patent applications mentioned in the preceding sentence are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Alternatively, quenching agents which react with, and inactivate the compounds can be added to the reaction mixture. Exemplary quenching agents and methods are disclosed in co-owned U. S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/070,597, filed January 6, 1998 and U.S. Patent Application attorney docket No. 28217- 20006.00, filed July 6, 1998; the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
A wide variety of groups are available for use as the anchors, linkers, and effectors. Examples of anchor groups which can be used in the alkylator compound include, but are not limited to, intercalators (including aromatic intercalators), minor groove binders, major groove binders, molecules which bind by electrostatic interactions or hydrophobic interactions, and molecules which bind by sequence specific interactions. The following is a non-limiting list of possible anchor groups: acridines (and acridine derivatives, e.g. proflavine, acriflavine, diacridines, acridones, benzacridines, quinacrines), actinomycins, anthracyclinones, rhodomycins, daunomycin, thioxanthenones (and thioxanthenone derivatives, e.g. miracil D), anthramycin, mitomycins, echinomycin (quinomycin A), triostins, ellipticine (and dimers, trimers and analogs thereof), norphilin A, fluorenes (and derivatives, e.g. fluorenones, fluorenodiamines), phenazines, phenanthridines, phenothiazines (e.g., chlorpromazine), phenoxazines, benzothiazoles, xanthenes and thioxanthenes, anthraquinones, anthrapyrazoles, benzothiopyranoindoles, 3,4-benzopyrene, 1-pyrenyloxirane, benzanthracenes, benzodipyrones, quinolines (e.g., chloroquine, quinine, phenylquinoline carboxamides), furocoumarins (e.g., psoralens and isopsoralens), ethidium, propidium, coralyne, and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons and their oxirane derivatives; distamycin, netropsin, other lexitropsins, Hoechst 33258 and other Hoechst dyes,
DAPI (4',6-diamidino-2-phenylindole), berenil, and triarylmethane dyes; aflatoxins; spermine, spermidine, and other polyamines; and nucleic acids or analogs which bind by sequence specific interactions such as triple helix formation, D-loop formation, and direct base pairing to single stranded targets.
Derivatives of these compounds are also non-limiting examples of anchor groups, where a derivative of a compound includes, but is not limited to, a compound which bears one or more substituent of any type at any location, oxidation or reduction products of the compound, etc. Examples of linkers which can be used in the invention are, but are not limited to, compounds which include functional groups such as ester (where the carbonyl carbon of the ester is between the anchor and the sp oxygen of the ester; this arrangement is also called "forward ester"), "reverse ester" (where the sp oxygen of the ester is between the anchor and the carbonyl carbon of the ester), thioester (where the carbonyl carbon of the thioester is between the anchor and the sulfur of the thioester, also called "forward thioester"), reverse thioester (where the sulfur of the thioester is between the anchor and the carbonyl carbon of the thioester, also called "reverse thioester"), forward and reverse thionoester, forward and reverse dithioic acid, sulfate, forward and reverse sulfonates. phosphate, and forward and reverse phosphonate groups. "Thioester" designates the -C(=O)-S- group; "thionoester" designates the -C(=S)-O- group, and "dithioic acid" designates the -C(=S)-S- group. For groups which can be designated as "forward" and "reverse", the forward orientation is that orientation of the functional groups wherein, after hydrolysis of the functional group, the resulting acidic function is covalently linked to the anchor moiety and the resulting alcohol or thiol function is covalently linked to the effector moiety. The reverse orientation is that orientation of the functional groups wherein, after hydrolysis of the functional group, the resulting acidic function is covalently linked to the effector moiety and the resulting alcohol or thiol function is covalently linked to the anchor moiety.
Examples of effectors which can be used in the invention are, but are not limited to, mustard groups, mustard group equivalents, epoxides, aldehydes, formaldehyde synthons, and other alkylating and cross-linking agents. Mustard groups are defined as including mono or bis haloethylamine groups, and mono haloethylsulfide groups. Mustard group equivalents are defined by groups that react by a mechanism similar to the mustards (that is, by forming an aziridinium intermediate, or by having or by forming an aziridine ring, which can react with a nucleophile), such as mono or bis mesylethylamine groups, mono mesylethylsulfide groups, mono or bis tosylethylamine groups, and mono tosylethylsulfide groups. Formaldehyde synthons are defined as any compound that breaks down to formaldehyde in aqueous solution, including hydroxymethylamines such as hydroxymethylglycine. Examples of formaldehyde synthons are given in U.S. Pat. No. 4,337,269 and in International Patent Application WO 97/02028.
Alkylator compounds that can be used to prepare the leukocytes of this invention are described by the following general formulas I, II, and III. General formula I is:
Figure imgf000036_0001
(I) wherein at least one of Rj, R2, R3, R^ R , R6, R7, Rg and R is -V-W-X-E as defined below, and the remainder of Rls R , R3, R , R5, R6, R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from the group consisting of -H, -R10, -O-R10, -NO2, -NH2, -NH-Rio, -N(Rιo) , -F, -CI, -Br, -I, -C(=O)-R10, -C(=O)-O-R10, and -O-C(=O)-R10, where -Rio is independently H, -Cj-8 alkyl, -Cι-8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl, -aryl-C1-3heteroalkyl, -heteroaryl-Cι-3alkyl, -heteroaryl-C1-3heteroalkyl,
-Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι- heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cualkyl-heteroaryl-Ci.a alkyl, -C1-3alkyl-aryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι- heteroalkyl, or -C ι -3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C i -3 heteroalkyl; V is independently -Rπ-, -NH-Ri i- or -N(CH3)-R! i-, where -Rn- is independently
-Cι-8alkyl-, -C1-8heteroalkyl-, -aryl-, -heteroaryl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-, -C].3heteroalkyl-aryl-, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl-, -aryl-Ci-3heteroalkyl-, -heteroaryl-C)-3alkyl-, -heteroaryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl-,
Figure imgf000036_0002
alkyl-, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl-, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-C1-3 alkyl-, -C1-3alkyl-aryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl-, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl-, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl-, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl-, or -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl-;
W is independently -C(=O)-O-, -O-C(=O)-, -C(=S)-O-, -O-C(=S)-, -C(=S)-S-, -S-C(=S)-, -C(=O)-S-, -S-C(=O)-, -O-S(=O)2-O-, -S(=O)2-O-, -O-S(=O)2-, -O-P(=O)(-ORιo)-O-, -P(=O)(-ORιo)-O-, -O-P(=O)(-OR10)-;
X is independently -Rn-; and
E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R12)2, -N(Rι2)(Rι3), -S-R12, and
Figure imgf000037_0001
where -R12 is -CH2CH2-G, where each G is independently -CI, -Br, -I, -O-S(=O)2-CH3, -O-S(=O)2-CH2-C6H5, or -O-S(=O)2-C6H4-CH3; and where R13 is independently -Cι-8 alkyl, -Cι-8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl,
Figure imgf000037_0002
-C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl, -aryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl, -heteroaryl-C)-3alkyl, -heteroaryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl,
Figure imgf000037_0003
alkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl,
Figure imgf000037_0004
heteroalkyl,
Figure imgf000037_0005
heteroalkyl, or -C 1 ^heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C 1 -3 heteroalkyl; and all salts and stereoisomers (including enantiomers and diastereomers) thereof.
A preferred composition according to Formula I is the compound S-303, wherein V is -NHR11-, Rn is -CH2CH2-, W is -C(=O)-O-, X is -CH2CH2-, E is -N(R12)2, R12 is -CH2CH2G, and G is -CI. See also co-owned PCT application US98/00531.
General formula II is:
Figure imgf000037_0006
(II) where Rj, R2, R3, R , R5, R6, R7, and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of -H, -R10, -O-R10, -NO2, -NH2, -NH-R10, -N(R10)2, -F, -CI, -Br, -I, -C(=O)-R10,
-C(=O)-O-R10, and -O-C(=O)-Rι0, where -R]0 is independently H, -Cι-8 alkyl, -Cj.g heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl,
-C]-3alkyl-aryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl, -Cj-3alkyl-heteroaryl, -C1-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι,3alkyl, -aryl-Cι_3heteroalkyl,
Figure imgf000037_0007
Figure imgf000037_0008
alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -C]-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι.3 alkyl, -Cj-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl,
Figure imgf000038_0001
heteroalkyl, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-C]-3 heteroalkyl, or -C i -3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C i -3 heteroalkyl;
R20 is -H or -CH ; and R2ι is -Rπ-W-X-E, where -Rn- is independently -Cι-8alkyl-, -C1- heteroalkyl-, -aryl-, -heteroaryl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-, -C]-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl-, -aryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl-, -heteroaryl-C1-3alkyl-, -heteroaryl-C]-3heteroalkyl-,
Figure imgf000038_0002
alkyl-, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl-,
Figure imgf000038_0003
alkyl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl-,
-Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-, -d-salkyl-heteroaryl-Ci-a heteroalkyl-, or -C i -3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C ] -3 heteroalkyl-;
W is independently -C(=O)-O-, -O-C(=O)-, -C(=S)-O-, -O-C(=S)-, -C(=S)-S-, -S-C(=S)-, -C(=O)-S-, -S-C(=O)-, -O-S(=O)2-O-, -S(=O)2-O-, -O-S(=O)2-, -O-P(=O)(-OR10)-O-, -P(=O)(-ORι0)-O-, -O-P(=O)(-OR10)-;
X is independently -Rn-; and
E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R!2)2, -N(Rι2)(Ri3), -S-R12, and
Figure imgf000038_0004
where -R12 is -CH2CH2-G, where each G is independently -CI, -Br, -I, -O-S(=O)2-CH3, -O-S(=O)2-CH2-C6H5, or -O-S(=O)2-C6H4-CH3; and where R13 is independently -C1-8 alkyl, -C1-8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -C1-3alkyl-aryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl, -C1-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl, -aryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl, -heteroaryl-Cι-3alkyl, -heteroaryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl,
-Cι-3alkyl-aryl-C1-3 alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι.3 alkyl, -C]-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl,
Figure imgf000038_0005
alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, or -C 1 -3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C 1- heteroalkyl; and all salts and stereoisomers (including enantiomers and diastereomers) thereof. General formula III is:
Figure imgf000039_0001
(III) wherein at least one of R 4, R55, R3, R4, R5, and R8 is -V-W-X-E, and the remainder of R , R55, R3, R^ R5, and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of -H,
-R,o, -O-R10, -NO2, -NH2, -NH-R10, -N(R10)2, -F, -CI, -Br, -I, -C(=O)-Rι0, -C(=O)-O-R10, and -O-C(=O)-R10, where -R10 is independently H, -Ci.g alkyl, -Cι-8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl, -Cj-3heteroalkyl-aryl, -C]-3alkyl-heteroaryl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl, -aryl-Cijheteroalkyl,
Figure imgf000039_0002
-heteroaryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl,
-C1-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -C1-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-d-3 alkyl, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-C1-3 heteroalkyl, or -C 1 -3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-C 1.3 heteroalkyl; V is independently -Rn-, -NH-Rj \- or -N(CH3)-Rn-, where -Ri 1- is independently
-Cι-8alkyl-, -Cι-8heteroalkyl-, -aryl-, -heteroaryl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl-,
Figure imgf000039_0003
-heteroaryl-Ci^alkyl-, -heteroaryl-Ci ^heteroalkyl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl-, -d-sheteroalkyl-aryl-d-s alkyl-, -C1-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl-, -Cι-3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-, -d-sheteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Ci-s alkyl-, -C1-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-, -d-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-, or -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl-;
W is independently -C(=O)-O-, -O-C(-O)-, -C(=S)-O-, -O-C(=S)-, -C(=S)-S-, -S-C(=S)-, -C(=O)-S-, -S-C(=O)-, -O-S(=O)2-O-, -S(=O)2-O-, -O-S(=O)2-, -O-P(=O)(-OR10)-O-, -P(=O)(-OR10)-O-, -O-P(=O)(-OR10)-;
X is independently -Rn-; and E is independently selected from the group consisting of -N(R12)2, -N(Ri2)(Ri3),
-S-R12, and
Figure imgf000040_0001
where -R12 is -CH2CH2-G, where each G is independently -CI, -Br, -I,
-O-S(=O)2-CH3, -O-S(=O)2-CH2-C6H5, or -O-S(=O)2-C6H4-CH3; and where R13 is independently -C1-8 alkyl, -Cι-8 heteroalkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, -Cι- alkyl-aryl, -Cj_3heteroalkyl-aryl, -Cι.3alkyl-heteroaryl, -d-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl, -aryl-Cι-3alkyl, -aryl-Cj ^heteroalkyl, -heteroaryl-Ci^alkyl, -heteroaryl-Cι-3heteroalkyl, -Cι.3alkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-aryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cι-3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl,
Figure imgf000040_0002
heteroalkyl, -Cι-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 alkyl, -Cuheteroalkyl-aryl-Cu heteroalkyl, -Cι.3alkyl-heteroaryl-Cι.3 heteroalkyl, or -C1-3heteroalkyl-heteroaryl-Cι-3 heteroalkyl; and all salts and stereoisomers (including enantiomers and diastereomers) thereof.
It will be appreciated that, in general formula I above, the acridine nucleus is the anchor moiety, the -V-W-X- group(s) comprises the frangible linker, and the E group(s) is the effector group. Similarly, in general formula III above, the psoralen nucleus is the anchor moiety, the -V-W-X- group(s) comprises the frangible linker, and the E group(s) is the effector group. General formula II is a subset of general formula I.
Examples 7-12 illustrate the synthesis of these compounds to produce the leukocytes of the invention.
In one embodiment of the invention, 4'-(4-amino-2-oxa) butyl-4,5',8- trimethylpsoralen ("S-59"), previously disclosed in co-owned U.S. Patent No. 5,399,719 (the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety), is also useful for photochemical treatment of leukocyte populations.
Photoactivatable compounds suitable for use in the methods of this invention include: Furocoumarins; Actinomycins; Anthracyclinones; Anthramycins; Benzodipyrones; Fluorenes and Fluorenones; Monostral Fats Blue; Norphillin A; Organic Dyes; Phenanthridines; Phenazathionium Salts; Phenazines; Phenothiazines; Phenylazides; Quinolines and Thiaxanthenones. The preferred species of photoactivatable compounds described herein is commonly referred to as the furocoumarins.
Psoralen and derivatives
Psoralens are planar, aromatic organic compounds belonging to the group of furocoumarins. Psoralens are found in nature, principally in plants, including limes, cloves, celery, parsnips and figs. In humans, psoralens have been used in photochemotherapy for the management of vitiligo, psoriasis and mycosis fungoides. For a review of psoralen photochemistry, see Parsons, B.J. Photochem. Photobiol. 32:813-821, 1980. The basic structure of psoralen is shown below.
In particular, the present invention contemplates psoralens, [7H-furo(3,2-g)-(l)- benzopyran-7-one, or b-lactone of 6-hydroxy-5-benzofuranacrylic acid], which are linear:
Figure imgf000041_0001
and in which the two oxygen residues appended to the central aromatic moiety have a 1 , 3 orientation, and further in which the furan ring moiety is linked to the 6 position of the two ring coumarin system. Psoralen derivatives are derived from substitution of the linear furocoumarin at the 3, 4, 5, 8, 4', or 5' positions.
With regard to safety concerns, psoralen is already present in our diets. Psoralens are relatively inactive in the absence of long- wavelength UVA radiation. The effective half-life of UVA-activated psoralen is measured in milliseconds. Any drug remaining after radiation returns to the inactive state, thus limiting side effects.
Previous protocols for inactivation of pathogens have necessitated the removal of molecular oxygen from the reaction before and during exposure to light, to prevent damage to blood products from oxygen radicals produced during irradiation. See L. Lin et al., Blood 74:517 (1989); US Patent No. 4,727,027, to Wiesehahn. The methods of the present invention can be used to arrest proliferation in leukocytes in the presence of oxygen. Further, with novel psoralens used in the methods of the present invention, there is no need to reduce the concentration of molecular oxygen. The preferred psoralens have low mutagenicity and high nucleic acid binding affinity.
8-Methoxypsoralen (known in the literature under various named, e.g., xanthotoxin, methoxsalen, 8-MOP) is a naturally occurring psoralen with low mutagenicity in the Ames assay.
4'-Aminomethyl-4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT) is one of most reactive nucleic acid binding psoralen derivatives, providing up to 1 AMT adduct per 3.5 DNA base pairs (S.T. Isaacs, G. Wiesehahn and L.M. Hallick, NCI Monograph 66:21, 1984). "4'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens", or "4-PAP", are defined as psoralen compounds which have an NH2 group linked to the 4'-position of the psoralen by a hydrocarbon chain having a total length of 2 to 20 carbons, where 0 to 6 of those carbons are independently replaced by NH or O, and each point of replacement is separated from each other point of replacement by at least two carbons, and is separated from the psoralen by at least one carbon. 4'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens may have additional substitutions on the 4, 5', and 8 positions of the psoralen, said substitutions include, but are not limited to, the following groups: H and (CH2)„CH3, where n = 0-6.
"5'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens", also referred to herein by the acronym "5-PAP", are defined as psoralen compounds which have an NH2 group linked to the 5'- position of the psoralen by a hydrocarbon chain having a total length of 1 to 20 carbons, where 0 to 6 of those carbons are independently replaced by NH or O, and each point of replacement is separated from each other point of replacement by at least two carbons, and is separated from the psoralen by at least one carbon. 5'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens may have additional substitutions on the 4, 4', and 8 positions of the psoralen, said substitutions include, but are not limited to, the following groups: H and (CH2)nCH3, where n = 0-6. Examples of 4-PAP and 5-PAP (including S-59) as well as their methods of synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Patents Nos. 5,585,503; 5,578,736; 5,556,993; and 5,399,719.
Preferred psoralens include 5'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens and 4'-primaryamino-substituted psoralens (collectively referred to herein as PAP), 8-methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), 4'-aminomethyl 4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT), 5-methoxy psoralen (5-MOP), and trioxalen 4, 5' 8-trimethylpsoralen. AMT, 5-MOP, 8-MOP, and trioxalen are commercially available. The most preferred psoralen, is S-59 which has the formula shown above (see under Abbreviations, S-59). S-59 is a synthetic psoralen that can bind reversibly to nucleic acids by intercalation. Upon illumination with UVA, intercalated S-59 forms monoadducts and interstrand crosslinks with RNA and DNA. S-59 photochemical treatment is nucleic acid specific and S-59 readily penetrates cellular and nuclear membranes. S-59 combines a higher water solubility and nucleic acid binding affinity, with a high quantum yield for the formation of nucleic acid adducts. This allows the use of lower psoralen concentrations for PCT for inhibiting proliferation in the absence of nonspecific cellular damage. Mutagenicity and gene toxicity studies on S-59 demonstrated a 40,000-67,000 fold safety margin for the concentration used to decontaminate pathogens in blood products. Finally, the doses of S-59 used for PCT are well below the average daily dietary intake (Wagstaff, D.J. Reg. Tox. Pharm. 14:261-272, 1991) of furocoumarins, the chemical group that includes psoralens.
In one embodiment, a cell population comprising a population of leukocytes is treated with a photoactivatable compound including a moiety capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid upon photoactivation. Thus, to form a covalent bond with nucleic acid, the photoactivatable compound must be activated by light. Light encompasses ultraviolet light (UVA, UVB, UVC) and visible light. In one embodiment wavelengths used for PCT range from 200-450 nm. In a preferred embodiment, the light used for PCT is in the wavelength of 320-400 nm.
Preferably, the cell population is photochemically treated with UV light having a wavelength in the range of 320 to 400 nm. UVA radiation alone causes minimal damage to cells.
In one embodiment, the photoactivatable compound comprises a psoralen molecule. PCT with the appropriate concentration of psoralen and dose of UVA light will result in proliferation inhibition with the retention of leukocyte immunogenic functions effective, for example, to promote destruction of a diseased cell, an infected cell, or a pathogen, induce an antileukemic effect, facilitate engraftment by a second population of cells, promote immune reconstitution, facilitate immunotherapy, and treat mixed chimerism. Psoralen reactivity is not only specifically directed towards the nucleic acids versus the proteins in a cell, but there is also a differential binding affinity of psoralens for DNA vs RNA molecules due to the difference in nucleic acid structure that allows better intercalation in DNA (Cimino, G.D. et al, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 54:1151-1193, 1985). Additionally, using this technology, it may be possible to differentially modify transcriptionally active (vs. inactive) genes, due to their different conformation and state of histone binding which will affect psoralen binding. Treatments such as PCT therefore have the ability to interfere with cellular function, primarily at the level of DNA synthesis (replication), with a lesser effect on transcription, and minimal or no effect on protein synthesis. In the case of PCT, for example, the level of interference will be determined by the concentration of the psoralen and dose of UVA light used.
Samples of leukocytes mixed with a photoactivatable compound are photochemically treated using a photoactivation device. In general, a photoactivation device suitable for the present methods of PCT comprises the following: (a) a means for providing appropriate wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation to cause photoactivation of a photoactivatable compound; (b) means for supporting a plurality of samples in a fixed relationship with the radiation providing means during photoactivation; and (c) means for maintaining the temperature of the samples within a desired temperature range during photoactivation.
In one embodiment, the photoactivation device is capable of emitting a given intensity of a spectrum of electromagnetic radiation comprising wavelengths between 200 and 450 nm, preferably between 320 nm and 400 nm. Particular wavelengths can be selected using appropriate filters within the photoactivation device. A suitable photoactivation device as well as methods of photoactivating photoactivatable compounds by the use of the device are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,184,020 and 5,503,721, both to Hearst et al. and in WO 96/39820. Other photoactivation devices that may be used include General Electric type F20TI2-BLB fluorescent UVA bulbs (Alter, H. J., et al., The Lancet, 24:1446 (1988), and Type A405-TLGW/05 long wavelength ultraviolet lamp manufactured by P. W. Allen Co., London.
Photochemical treatment of leukocytes with psoralens
Stock solutions of psoralens are prepared in water or in the appropriate solvent as exemplified below in the Examples. The stock psoralen solutions are added to suspensions of purified donor leukocyte populations to the desired final concentration. Units that were treated with 8-MOP were prepared by using PAS saturated with 8-MOP in the preparation procedure discussed above. The purified donor leukocytes are illuminated with UVA light to a final dose of between 10" to 100 J/cm in a photoactivation device. The samples are agitated during illumination. Samples of the leukocytes are taken prior to illumination as controls.
Typically, the PAP is added to the purified leukocyte preparation at a concentration of between 10"4 and 150 μM, preferably between 10"3 and 150 μM. The leukocytes will generally be at a cell density of between about 10 to 109 cells/ml, preferably between about
103 to 108 cells/ml, even more preferably between about 104 to 107 cells/ml, most preferably at about 2 x 10 cells/ml.
In a preferred embodiment, PCT is performed on leukocytes combined with S-59 using ultraviolet light of wavelength of between 320-400 nm. Restricting the photoactivation process to wavelengths greater than 320 nm minimizes direct nucleic acid damage since there is very little absorption by nucleic acids above 313 nm. The cells will preferably receive a light dose in the range of about 10"3 to 100 J/cm2, more preferably 1 to
3 J/cm2. In a most preferred embodiment, the light dose is at 3 J/cm2. Illumination will generally be at a light intensity of between 1 to 50 mW/cm . The time period for exposure of the leukocyte sample to UV light will be between about 1 second to 60 minutes, preferably about 3 minutes, more preferably about one minute.
After PCT, the leukocyte samples will be assayed for effectiveness to proliferate and to participate in leukocyte activity, as described above and in the Examples.
Primarily, the following parameters will be measured: cell viability; proliferation activity; cytokine secretion; and surface antigen expression.
Therapeutic applications
The treated leukocyte populations of the present invention, which are non- proliferating but retain immunological activity, have various prophylactic and therapeutic uses as described below. Typically, individuals receiving DLIs containing treated leukocyte populations will include but are not limited to, transplant patients such as post BM transplant patients or patients anticipating a solid organ transplant. The fact that the treated leukocytes do not elicit GVHD enables greater numbers of leukocytes (i.e. larger cell doses) to be administered in the DLI, thus maximizing the efficacy of treatment. The treated leukocytes are useful for donor leukocyte infusion (DLI) especially to provide immunocompetence to allo-BMT patients, or immunocompromised patients such as elderly patients suffering from CLL. DLI using treated leukocytes are useful to alleviate various conditions including the following: Leukemia including Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML), Chronic Lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML), Acute Myelogenous
Leukemia (AML), and Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL); Multiple Myeloma (MM);
Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma and Hodgkin's lymphoma; Large Cell Lymphoma (LCL); and Epstein-Barr virus induced B lymphoproliferative disorder (EBV-BLPD or EBV-induced lymphoma);
Solid tumors, including breast, lung, ovarian, testicular, prostate and colon cancer, melanoma, renal cell carcinoma, neuroblastoma, head and neck tumors;
Aplastic anemia; Myelodysplasia; Immunodeficiencies e.g. Common variable, SCID, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome,
Agranulocytosis;
Mixed chimerism; and
Genetic diseases.
DLIs are useful in various formats for prophylactic or therapeutic purposes: (a) adoptive immunotherapy for all allogeneic transplants;
(b) immune reconstitution for immunosuppressed or immunodeficient patients;
(c) treatment of elderly leukemia patients who are ineligible for transplant;
(d) BMT light or minitransplants
The BMT light protocol is a two step process which involves: i) induction of transplantation tolerance using a minimum conditioning regimen and donor stem cells; and ii) immunotherapy with DLI repeatedly. This protocol circumvents the toxicity of chemotherapy regimens. The BMT light protocol is suitable in the following indications: for patients who are not normally eligible for transplants, particularly elderly patients (> 65 years old); and for CLL patients, most of whom are severely immunocompromised. BMT light regimen reduces toxicity, GVHD, and infection. An exemplary BMT light protocol is described in Example 13 below.
(e) CD34 selected/T cell depleted allogeneic grafts plus concurrent DLI.
DLI provided concurrently with CD34+ selected cells (selection to enrich for stem and progenitor cells) are useful to confer adoptive immunotherapy against infections, such as by CMV, Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad), Kaposi's Sarcoma associated
Herpes virus, and fungal infections, and to treat leukemia, e.g., CML.
(f) Treatment of mixed chimerism.
(g) salvage chemotherapy or chemo-resistant leukemia In one embodiment of the invention, PA-DLI is administered in haploidentical (haplo) transplantation. Normally, haplo transplantation requires almost complete T cell depletion, leading to severe, sustained immunosuppression. PA-DLI would be useful to maintain immunocompetence in the host; additionally, a GVL effect may be provided for the treatment of cancer.
In preferred embodiments, the leukocytes of the present invention that are incompetent in GVHD but retain some immune function will be used in DLI for the alleviation of relapsing cancer or removal of minimal residual disease following allogeneic BMT, particularly in CML and acute leukemias, lymphomas and multiple myelomas. The high number of donor CTLs specific to the bcr-abl protein of CML contributes to the efficacy of DLI in relapsing CML. A cancer patient is determined to be suffering a "relapse' if malignant cells are detected, by means routinely used by physicians to monitor the presence of cancerous cells.
In another embodiment, DLI containing the non-proliferating leukocytes is used in the treatment of leukemia patients during induction chemotherapy (initial round of chemotherapy) to avoid myeloablative regimens and to remove minimal residual disease. By using DLI in this setting, the toxic dose of chemotherapeutic drug given during induction could be reduced.
In one embodiment of the invention, PA-DLI can also be applied in solid organ transplants (e.g., kidney, heart, skin) as a means to increase the lifetime of allografts and the chances of donor organ acceptance. Most of the organ rejections in the allogeneic transplant occur due to the presence of passenger leukocytes in the donor organ. Due to the lack of proliferation and inability to mediate GVHD, the DLI (using leukocytes from the organ donor) may be used as a tolerization regimen before transplantation for the suppression of the immune response which will otherwise induce organ rejection.
Tolerization of the host for solid organ transplant would consist of the following: before or during organ transplant procedure, infusion of PA-DLI with or without donor stem cells with some level of myeloablative regimen to allow donor cells to survive in circulation. DLI may facilitate engraftment of donor stem cells in this setting, allowing for mixed chimerism in the host.
In all types of transplant and engraftment situations, treated leukocytes can be administered to the host before, at the same time as, or after the transplant or graft. Multiple infusions of treated cell populations can be made at any of these times. The non-proliferating, immune functional leukocytes are especially invaluable for DLI in patients for whom traditional allogeneic BMT would be contraindicated, because of advanced age or comorbid disease. Elderly patients, (> 65 years old) presenting cancer are not prime candidates for allo BMT partly because the transplant cannot reconstitute an aged immune system very well and because of the severity of the procedure. Currently, the only option available to control cancer in elderly patients is chemotherapy, the side effects of which can be intolerable for these patients. The treated leukocytes of the present invention provide a much needed alternative to treating cancer in elderly patients and to providing immune defense against opportunistic infections. DLI will be useful to destroy cancerous cells without attendant GVHD.
In certain cases of treatment, it may be desirable to expand subpopulations of the donor leukocytes, particularly antigen-specific T cells and precursor cells, before subjecting the donor leukocyte population to treatment with the above-described compounds. The leukocyte population can be stimulated with an antigen specific to the diseased cell (e.g., tumor-associated antigens) or pathogen to expand/enrich for the number of cytotoxic and helper T cells specific to the antigen. The stimulation can be performed in vivo by vaccination of the donor with the appropriate antigen prior to isolation of the leukocytes from the stimulated donor; alternatively stimulation of isolated leukocytes can be carried out in vitro prior to treatment of the leukocyte population with the compound. For example, donors vaccinated with IgG from multiple myeloma patients have high levels of myeloma-specific precursor CTLs. Thus, for use in treating multiple myeloma (MM), it is preferable to prepare the leukocytes from such vaccinated donors. Pulsing dendritic cells with tumor-associated peptides for immunization of patients with non-Hodgkin's lymphoma is described in Hsu, FJ et al. Nat. Med. 2:52-58, 1996. Techniques of pulsing dendritic cells with peptide/antigens are reviewed in Stingl, G. et al.
Immunol. Today 16:330-333, 1995. cDNA immunization (transfecting the dendritic cell with the appropriate cDNA) is described in Pardoll, D. et al. Immunity 3:165-169, 1995. In adoptive immunotherapy for the treatment of CML, donors can be vaccinated with bcr- abl peptides before isolation of donor leukocytes for treatment by the method of the invention and subsequent infusion. Effective and immunogenic peptides for vaccination are described, e.g., by ten Bosch, G. et al. Blood 88:3522-3527, 1996. In yet another example, donor leukocytes for the treatment of prostate cancer are pre-stimulated with prostate specific antigen (PSA) either in vivo or in vitro, before treatment according to the method of the invention. Such vaccinations can be applied to boost precursor T cell populations and/or populations of T cells specific to other tumor specific antigens, viral antigens and antigens of other pathogens.
Leukocytes from donors vaccinated with the appropriate antigens are useful prophylactically or therapeutically, for providing an immunocompromised patient with immune defense against opportunistic infections such as cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus or adenovirus (Ad) infections. As an example, donors can be vaccinated against CMV antigens and their leukocytes isolated and subjected to treatment according to the methods of the invention for use in DLI to treat patients presenting CMV infections as a result of immunosuppression. Immunocompromised patients include patients under immunosuppressive drug treatment such as organ transplant patients (BM and other organs), HIV or EBV infected individuals, cancer patients, and individuals with immune deficiency diseases. Donor leukocytes can also be stimulated in vitro (also referred to as ex vivo expansion) to expand precursor pools. For example, in the case of multiple myeloma, donor leukocytes can be stimulated by in vitro culture with patient specific MM antigen presented by dendritic cells, before treatment to block GVHD activity.
Ex vivo or in vitro stimulation can also be employed to expand the population of antileukemic T cells for the treatment of CML. In CML, the classical translocation of the c-abl oncogene on chromosome 9 to the break point cluster region (bcr) on chromosome 22 (t(9;22)(q34;ql 1) results in a bcr-abl fusion gene and the expression of the bcr-abl 210 kD fusion oncoproteins. The bcr-abl fusion protein is CML specific and the two main variants of the bcr-abl protein are well characterized antigens. In vitro stimulation to expand T cells specific for the bcr-abl protein can be performed as described, e.g., by
Choudhury, A. et al. Blood 89: 1133-1142, 1997; ten Bosch, G. et al. Blood 88:3522- 3527, 1996; and Mannering et al. Blood 90:290-297, 1997. Peptides representing the breakpoint region or junction (novel junctional amino acid sequence) can serve as the immunogens for in vitro immunization of human T cells from a healthy donor (see ten Bosch et al, 1996, supra; Mannering et al., 1997, supra). The resultant CD4+ T cells recognized bcr-abl expressing cells from an allogeneic CML patient. In another approach, dendritic cells (DC) can be generated in vitro from peripheral blood cells of CML patients and used as antigen-presenting cells for the ex vivo expansion of antileukemic T cells (Choudhury et al, 1997, supra). More generally, donor antigen-presenting cells (APCs) can be pulsed with antigen characteristic of a diseased cell, or can be co-cultured with diseased cells (e.g., inactivated tumor cells); and these APCs can then be exposed to donor leukocytes prior to infusion of the donor leukocytes into a recipient. Alternatively, direct contact between the donor leukocyte and a diseased cell (or a diseased cell antigen) can be used to expand the T-cell population in the donor lymphocytes.
The "antigen" used to expand the T cells can be a polypeptide, a lipid or a carbohydrate moiety (or any combination, e.g., a glycoprotein), and can be isolated from the diseased cell or pathogen or recombinantly produced. A polypeptide-containing antigen need not constitute a full-length protein, as long as it includes at least one epitope.
The antigen can be contained in a vaccine composition as a full length protein or fragment thereof or as a recombinantly produced fusion protein, and may or may not be conjugated or otherwise presented with an adjuvant. The vaccine can take various forms: diseased cell expressing the antigen, or cell membrane preparation thereof; or the pathogen, preferably in inactivated form. Methods of preparing vaccines are taught in the literature, see, e.g.,
Harlow, supra. Methods of immunization and in vitro (ex vivo) stimulation and expansion of precursor cell populations are known in the art, see, e.g. Choudhury, A. et al. Blood 89: 1133-1142, 1997; ten Bosch, G. et al. Blood 88:3522-3527, 1996; Mannering et al. Blood 90:290-297, 1997. For in vivo use, the leukocytes will generally be administered in plasma, synthetic media or other physiologically buffered solution at a dosage of about 105 to 1011 leukocytes per kg weight per infusion, in a volume of about 50 to 500 ml or more. These parameters will vary with the treatment and disease and will be decided by the physicians treating the patient. The standard DLI practice is to administer leukocytes at a dose of 107 to 108 cells per kg of body weight. DLI can be administered in conjunction with chemotherapy.
For in vivo uses, the leukocytes of the present invention will generally be administered intravenously.
GVHD is usually apparent within 90 days after the BMT. For alleviating disease in cancer relapse patients, DLI is performed preferably within 1 week to 3 months after diagnosis of relapse. For adoptive immunotherapy after allo BMT, DLI can be delivered before to several years after BMT, as maintenance therapy. For cancer patients receiving DLI instead of BMT, the DLI is preferably administered soon after diagnosis of the cancer. In the absence of BMT, DLI can be provided before, during or after chemo and irradiation regimens or other therapeutic regimens. In all indications, the appropriate timing of the DLI will be determined by the physicians of skill in the treatment of the disease.
Assessment of treatment success: After a DLI, the host or patient is monitored for GVHD following routine procedures. GVHD is usually apparent within 90 days post infusion. Clinical GVHD symptoms include skin rash, swelling and lesions in the liver, gut, lungs and joints, severe diarrhea and jaundice. The level of the patient's bilirubin and liver function enzymes can be measured and a liver biopsy can also be done. Patients receiving DLI can be monitored regularly for detailed clinical history, physical examination, general laboratory evaluation including complete blood count and differential, urinalysis, blood urea nitrogen creatinine, bilirubin, aspartate transaminase (AST), alanine transferase (ALT), alkaline phosphatase, Na+, K+, CI", albumin, total protein, glucose, and radiographic examination. The status of the cancer can be assessed for example, by examination of marrow aspirates and biopsy, cytogenetic examination (including immunohistochemical analysis), and molecular analysis.
For the purposes of this invention, a recipient of the present treated leukocytes is alleviated of the disease (disease refers to malignancy or infection) if there is visible or measurable improvement in the symptoms of or resulting from the disease. The symptoms and methods of assessing improvement in them will vary with the disease condition but will be familiar to the clinician. One useful endpoint for evaluating treatment success is
100 day mortality.
The methods and compositions of the invention are also useful for prevention of GVHD is situations other than DLI. These include, but are not limited to, platelet transfusions and febrile, non-hemolytic transfusion reactions resulting from cytokine accumulation during platelet storage.
The present methods and the treated, non-proliferating leukocytes of the present invention also have in vitro uses. The PCT procedure, for example, is a minimally invasive method of inhibiting DNA synthesis without affecting the biosynthesis of cells in primary cultures or cell lines which have the ability to differentiate, such as progenitor cells and stem cells. Thus, treatment conditions can be used to prepare isolated stem cells, leukocytes or other cell lines in an assay to test whether a cell differentiation or development step is dependent on proliferation/DNA synthesis. Such studies may identify target molecules along the differentiation or development pathway and facilitate development of drugs for either inhibiting or promoting differentiation. Treated leukocytes can also be used, e.g., as stimulator cells in a one way MLR assay, to stimulate immune responses of proliferation competent allogeneic cells without the simultaneous proliferation of the stimulator cells themselves. PCT and related treatments, using compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with DNA, would replace the current use of irradiation or mitomycin C to achieve cytostatis of the stimulator cells. For these in vitro uses, compositions of treated leukocytes or other cells can be provided either alone or as part of an assay kit. The assay kit can be for MLR or for the differentiation assay. For these purposes, the treated cells will generally be provided in frozen form. Alternatively, kits may provide reagents and instructions for preparation of leukocytes or other cells having the above-described characteristics. The reagents will include one or more compounds capable of forming a covalent bond with DNA. For example, a kit to be used for PCT will include one or more photoactivatable compounds, preferably a PAP or an acridine, more preferably, S-59.
The following examples are intended to illustrate the invention described herein but not to limit its scope. Certain modifications to the method will be readily apparent to one of skill in the art and are encompassed by the claims.
EXAMPLES
Various assays
Proliferation assay by H Thymidine incorporation.
In a typical assay, cells are grown in 96-well plates for a desired period of time in the presence or absence of the test compound (e.g. DNA replication inhibitor or mitogen). Media is prepared that typically contains 1 μCi/50 μl/well using 3H thymidine of approximately 20 Ci/mmol specific activity. This media/label is added to the cells and the cells are incubated at 37°C for approximately 4-6 hours or longer. For convenience, a multichannel cell harvester is used to transfer cells to paper filter discs and to wash away free (unincorporated) label. The discs are then dried, transferred to vials and immersed in scintillation fluid. The vials can then be placed in an automated counter, counting for the full tritium range, and the average counts per minute (cpm) for triplicate samples is determined. Measurement of compound-DNA adducts
3H-labeled PAP was used to measure the extent of DNA modification. PAP was added to the desired final concentrations in the purified leukocyte samples. Aliquots of 20 mL in mini-PL2410 plastic containers were illuminated with the appropriate UV light dose. The control sample was treated with PAP alone without UVA. After illumination, leukocyte DNA was purified. The DNA content of each sample was determined by measurement of absorbance at 260 nm. The number of psoralen adducts per 1,000 base pairs (bp) was calculated from the radioactivity in the DNA samples. A standard curve correlates the amount of 3H counts with the number of adducts.
PCR Inhibition Assay
Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) methodology is well known in the art. See K.B. Mullis et al, US Patents Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202, hereby incorporated by reference. This assay can be used to evaluate the effect of PAP-DNA adducts on the template function of specific nucleic acid sequences.
DNA samples (1 μg) obtained from photochemically-treated or gamma irradiated platelet concentrates were PCR amplified for a 242 bp sequence in the HLA-DQα locus or for a 439 bp sequence in the β-globin gene locus. Control (untreated) DNA was serially diluted (1 :10) and then amplified. The treated DNA was amplified without dilution. PCR amplification was carried out to 35 cycles. This assay provided a means to correlate functional T-cell proliferation inhibition, as measured in a cell proliferation assay, with direct modification of nucleic acid.
The following examples 1 to 4 demonstrated that the effect of PCT on the properties of treated leukocytes correlates with leukocyte DNA modification and inhibition of polymerase activity. Secondly, PCT treatment of leukocytes in platelet concentrates can prevent transfusion activated GVHD in a murine transfusion model.
Example 1 Photochemical Inactivation of T-cells
Example 1 demonstrated that leukocytes can be inactivated by PCT in a dose dependent manner. As exemplary psoralens, S-59, AMT and 8-MOP were used. The PCT dose dependence varies with the properties of the psoralen used, S-59 being the most efficient tested.
The dose related effect of photochemical treatment with S-59 (Squares), 4'-aminomethyl 4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen [AMT] (triangles), and 8-methoxypsoralen [8-MOP] (circles) on leukocytes in platelet concentrates (PC) was characterized and the results shown in Fig. 1. Platelet concentrates were prepared and treated as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,593,823, incorporated herein by reference. Leukocytes from photochemically-treated and untreated pooled random donor PC were plated in an LDA assay. Varying concentrations of the three psoralens were used with a constant light dose of 1 Joule/cm2 UVA. T-cells were inactivated to the limit of detection by LDA (indicated by arrows) with 0.05 μM S-59, 1.0 μM AMT, and 10.0 μM 8-MOP. These data clearly demonstrate that S-59 is a superior photoreagent, compared to AMT and 8-MOP, in inhibiting proliferation of T cells.
Example 2
Mixed Leukocyte Reaction
Peripheral blood was drawn into anticoagulant citrate dextrose (ACD) tubes from four individuals. The peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC's) were isolated by density gradient centrifugation over Ficoll. The PBMC's from three donors were pooled and served as allostimulators. The PBMC's from the remaining individual was used as the responder. The stimulator and responder PBMC's were washed two times with RPMI supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2mM L-glutamine, 100 U/mL penicillin, and 100 μg/mL streptomycin and resuspended in the supplemented media.
The stimulator PBMC's were exposed to 2500 cGy gamma radiation from a blood bank 137cesium irradiator. The stimulator cells were then plated in 96 well round bottom plates in aliquots of 100 μL containing 1.0 x 105 cells.
The responder cells were subjected to PCT with S-59 as follows. Responder cells were resuspended in 30 mL of the above cell culture media and aqueous S-59 stock solution (dissolved in water) was added to the cell suspension to the final concentrations specified in Figure 2, Figure 3 or Figure 4. The concentration of S-59 stock solution and volume used varied depending on the final S-59 concentration desired. The 30 mL cell solution containing S-59 was then transferred to a small PL2410 bag and illuminated with
UVA light at a dosage of 3 J/cm . For Figure 3, the light dosage was 3.0 J/cm . The cells were then centrifuged, resuspended in cell culture media and plated in aliquots of 100 μL containing 1.0 x 105 cells and mixed with the stimulator cells for a final volume of 200 μL per well.
The plates were then incubated at 37°C with 5% CO2. Samples of the supernatant from the MLR were removed after 1, 2, and 7 days of incubation and stored at -80°C for subsequent cytokine analysis. Wells that were designated for the measurement of cell proliferation were incubated for 6 days. After the 6 day incubation all wells used to measure cell proliferation received 1 μCi of 3H thymidine. After 24 hours of incubation in the presence of 3H thymidine the cells were harvested onto glass fiber paper. The amount of incorporated 3H thymidine was then quantified by liquid scintillation counting. The results of the 3H thymidine incorporation by responder cells photochemically treated with various concentrations of S-59 are shown in Figure 2.
Analysis of synthesis of the cytokines IL-2 and IFN-γ by treated cells was done with ELISA assay kits provided by R&D systems, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Figures 3 and 4 show the results of the IL-2 and interferon-γ production, respectively. In Figure 4, IFN-γ analysis was done on the cell culture media taken on day seven.
Example 3 Leukocyte Function Modulation by PCT
Example 3 demonstrated that leukocyte activity, as measured by cytokine synthesis and surface marker expression (exemplified by CD69 lymphocyte activation marker expression) can be modulated by the concentration of the psoralen and the light dose used for the PCT. The data provide evidence that UVA light doses and concentrations of photoactivatable compounds can be titered to obtain appropriate ranges effective both to block proliferation of T cells in the leukocyte population, and to maintain leukocyte activity, as demonstrated by cytokine synthesis and surface marker expression.
a. Modulation of Cytokine Synthesis by PCT IL-8 synthesis was also measured after PCT with different concentrations of S-59 at a constant light dose of 0.5 J/cm2 UVA (see Figure 5). It was found that IL-8 synthesis could be modulated by PCT with increasing concentrations of S-59. A similar behavior was obtained at 1.0 J/cm2 UVA over a range of S-59 concentrations (data not shown). These results demonstrate that cytokine synthesis can be modulated by the concentration of the psoralen and dose of the light used for PCT.
b. Modulation of CD 69 expression on leukocytes after PCT treatment
The induction of the CD69 expression by leukocytes upon their activation by PMA and calcium ionophore was measured with the use of a fluorescent antibody to CD69 and FACS-Scan analysis (see Figure 6). The expression of CD69 was measured as a function of time after photochemical treatment with different concentrations of AMT and 1 J/cm2 UVA. The effect of PCT on the induction of CD69 expression was also found to be psoralen dose dependent, with expression of CD69 showing greater inhibition at increasing concentrations of AMT. At the low doses anticipated for S-59 in this study, induction will remain intact.
Example 4
DNA modification by PCT
Example 4 demonstrated that the effect of PCT on the properties of the treated leukocytes correlates with leukocyte DNA modification and inhibition of polymerase activity. Psoralen adducts on leukocyte genomic DNA were measured after photochemical treatment in pooled random donor PC by using H radiolabeled S-59, AMT, and 8-MOP plus 1.9 J/cm2 UVA and scintillation counting of the isolated DNA of treated leukocytes (Figure 7). Photochemical treatment with 150 μM S-59, AMT, and 8-MOP induced 12.0, 6.0, and 0.7 adducts/1000 bp of DNA respectively. The relative number of adducts after PCT on the genomic DNA of leukocytes treated correlated with the effect that PCT had on the leukocyte functions and demonstrated that the effect was a direct consequence of the DNA modification. Inhibition of DNA amplification by DNA polymerase (data not shown) in a PCR-inhibition assay showed the same dependence on the concentration of the psoralen used during PCT. The results from all of the biological and molecular parameters used here to study the effects of PCT on leukocytes in vitro are consistent. Assessment of leukocyte function, by limiting dilution analysis, measurement of cytokine production, and quantitation of psoralen induced DNA damage showed that PCT inactivates leukocytes in a dose dependent manner. Using appropriate doses, functions of the leukocytes such as the production of cytokines or the expression of antigenic markers can be controlled. Additionally, of the three psoralens tested S-59 is the most efficient in inactivating leukocytes. The dose range within which S-59 inhibits T-cell proliferation is approximately 3.5 log units. Therefore, the dose window within which leukocyte proliferation and attendant GVHD can be inhibited but immune function is retained is larger than that provided by other means of inactivation.
Example 5
Prevention of TA-GVHD in a murine transfusion model
The following murine transfusion model is a well characterized model that simulates the human clinical syndrome of TA-GVHD (Fast, LD et al. Blood 82: 292, 1993). Based on the promising in vitro results, the effect of S-59 photochemical treatment on the inhibition of TA-GVHD was evaluated, using this in vivo model, by transfusing splenocytes from a homozygous parent (strain A, H-2a) into immunocompetent heterozygous Fj hybrid recipients (strain B6AF1? H-2a/b).
Each recipient (F was transfused with approximately 108 donor (A or Fj) splenocytes via the lateral tail vein. Splenocytes obtained from density gradient centrifugation were used as the source of viable T cells. Three transfusion groups were utilized: (1) handling control group (Fι-»F|): B6AF1 splenocytes were transfused into B6AF1 recipients; (2) positive TA-GVHD control group (A-»Fι): donor A splenocytes were transfused into B6AF1 recipients; (3) S-59 photochemical treatment group (PCT A→-Fi): donor A splenocytes were treated with 150 μM S-59 and 3 Joules/cm2 UVA and then transfused into B6AF1 recipients.
Recipients were monitored for biological evidence of TA-GVHD two weeks post- transfusion. Spleens of recipients were analyzed for donor T-cell engraftment using two- color, fluorescence-activated flow cytometry. In this assay, splenic T-cells were stained with a pan-T-cell, anti-CD3 antibody and also with an anti-H-2b antibody. Donor A T-cells were detected by the absence of reaction with the anti H-2b antibody. In control experiments, greater than 99% of CD3 positive spleen cells from Fι-»F| recipients were labeled with the anti-H-2b antibody. In parallel, the presence of cytotoxic lymphocytes (CTLs) in the spleens of recipients was measured by using a 51 Cr-lysis assay. Spleen cells were incubated with 51Cr-labeled EL-4 cells (H-2b) at an effector: target ratio of 150:1 for 4—6 hours at 37°C. The cytotoxic activity of CTLs was determined by the target cell lysis and release of 51Cr into the culture medium. The results indicated that while recipients in the control F|— »Fι group remained healthy throughout the duration of the study, recipients in the A→-Fi group developed biological signs of TA-GVHD two to three weeks after transfusion of donor spleen cells. TA-GVHD was characterized by splenomegaly, donor T-cell (H-2a) engraftment (28.6±11.3%) and the presence of CTLs (35±18.7% 51Cr lysis) in recipient spleens (Table 1).
Splenomegaly was evaluated two weeks post-transfusion by measuring the spleen: body weight ratio. Development of immunodeficiency was detected by evaluation of thymic cellularity 3 weeks post-transfusion. Thymic hypoplasia is a reliable index of acquired immune deficiency associated with TA-GVHD. Recipients were also monitored for clinical symptoms of GVHD which included body weight, posture, activity, skin integrity, fur texture, white blood cell count, red blood cell count, and platelet count. Weekly body weight of the healthy animals in the Fi— »Fι group increased over time while the average body weight of animals in the A→Fi group failed to increase over time The average clinical score (grade 0 to 2, healthy animals were graded 0) of animals in the A— »Fι group increased over time indicating that TA-GVHD was outwardly apparent and progressively more severe. Animals in the PCT A— >Fι group were similar to animals in the control F|— Fι group and remained healthy and free of visible clinical manifestation of TA-GVHD. Twenty-five percent mortality was observed in the A— >Fι group when followed for more than 10 weeks post-transfusion, whereas all animals in the control
Fι- Fι and PCT A— »Fι groups remained healthy. TABLE 1
Figure imgf000059_0001
1. S.D. = standard eviation
2. Measured two weeks post-transfusion
3. Measured three weeks post transfusion Tissue sections were prepared and examined for histologic abnormality after blind coding. The liver was evaluated for the presence of lymphoid infiltrates with bile duct destruction and vascular endothelial inflammation and infiltration. Splenic histology was assessed for preservation or destruction of lymphoid follicles. Skin sections were evaluated for lymphoid infiltrates in sub-dermal areas and appendages. Bone marrow sections were evaluated for cellularity and maturation within each major lineage: myeloid, erythroid, and megakaryocytic. A- Fι mice developed histologic evidence of GVHD in liver, spleen, bone marrow, and oral mucosa in a blinded study. In contrast, recipients of either photochemically treated donor cells (PCT- A) or syngeneic cells (Fj) showed no histologic abnormalities. Transfusions for groups of mice where the infused cells were treated with S-59 concentrations varying from 50 nM to 150 μM and 3 J/cm2 UVA, showed complete GVHD inhibition over this range. This demonstrates that the dose window within which GVHD can be inhibited by PCT in vivo is similar to the one obtained for the in vitro assays. In conclusion of the in vitro and in vivo data, PCT treatment of leukocytes can inhibit their proliferation in vitro and inhibit TA-GVHD in vivo over 3.5 log units of S-59 concentration. For the same range of concentrations, a dose-dependent modulation of the leukocyte functions in vitro (cytokine synthesis and surface molecule expression) was observed.
Example 6 This example describes the approach for determining the PCT conditions suitable to suppress GVHD while preserving the GVL effect of DLIs for application, e.g., in the treatment of relapsing leukemia patients post-allogeneic BMT. The experimental objectives are summarized below.
A. Determination of the psoralen concentration range to be used in PCT so as to prevent proliferation of lymphocytes in vitro and thus inhibit GVHD.
B. Characterization of the phenotype of photochemically treated leukocytes in vitro to determine cell viability and expression of T and NK cell surface antigens indicative of generating a GVL effect in vivo.
C. Qualitative and quantitative analysis of cytokine expression by treated leukocytes in vitro.
D. Demonstration of inhibition of GVHD by treated leukocyte-DLIs in vivo on a murine leukemia model.
Photochemical treatment of leukocytes with psoralens
Stock solutions of psoralen are prepared as exemplified below. A 15 mM stock solution of AMT was prepared by dissolving 50 mg of AMT powder in 10 mL of distilled water. The solution was mixed vigorously and filtered through a 0.2 μm syringe filter.
The concentration of AMT in the filtered solution was determined by measuring the absorbance of the solution at 250 nm using a Shimadzu UVI60U spectrophotometer. The
AMT concentration was calculated using a value of 25000 M"'cm" for the extinction coefficient.
A stock solution of S-59 psoralen was prepared by dissolving a powder of S-59 in distilled water. The solution was mixed vigorously and filtered through a 0.2 μm syringe filter. The concentration of S-59 in the filtered solution was determined by measuring the absorbance of the solution at 250 nm using a Shimadzu UV160U spectrophotometer. The
S-59 concentration was calculated using a value of 25400 M"'cm" for the extinction coefficient. 8-methoxypsoralen (8-MOP) is poorly soluble in aqueous solutions. Therefore, leukocyte preparations that were treated with 8-MOP and ultraviolet light were prepared using PAS solution (PAS, available from Baxter, is an artificial blood substitute consisting of sodium acetate, trisodium citrate sodium chloride phosphate buffer pH=7.2 at 300 mOsm) saturated with 8-MOP. The saturated solution was prepared by suspending
100 mg of 8-MOP in 100 mL of PAS. The solution was agitated for 16 hours at room temperature in a dark container. The resulting solution was filtered through a 0.2 μm filter to remove any undissolved 8-MOP. The final 8-MOP concentration was determined by measuring absorbance at 248 nm using a Shimadzu UV160U spectrophotometer. The 8-MOP concentration was calculated using a value of 22900 M"'cm"! for the extinction coefficient.
The stock psoralen solutions are added to suspensions of purified donor leukocyte populations to the desired final concentration. Units that were treated with 8 -MOP were prepared by using PAS saturated with 8-MOP in the preparation procedure discussed above. The purified donor leukocytes are illuminated with UVA light to a final dose of between 10" to 100 J/cm in a photoactivation device. The units were agitated at 70 cycles/min during illumination. Samples of the leukocytes are taken prior to illumination for use as controls.
The S-59 is added to the purified leukocyte preparation at a concentration of
A R between 10- and 150 μM. The leukocytes will be provided at a cell density of 10 to 10 cells/mL, preferably at 107 cells/mL, more preferably at 2 x 106 cells/mL.
The sample of a leukocyte population mixed with S-59 is exposed to ultraviolet light of wavelength of between 200 and 450 nm, preferably 320-400 nm. The cells will preferably receive a light dose in the range of about 10"3 to 100 J/cm2. In a preferred embodiment, the light dose is at 3 J/cm . The time period for UV light exposure will be about 1 second to 60 minutes, preferably about 1 minute.
After PCT, the leukocyte samples will be assayed for the ability to proliferate and to participate in leukocyte activity, as described above and in the Examples. The following will be measured: cell viability and integrity; proliferation activity; surface antigen expression; cytokine secretion; GVHD and GVL activity.
The following assays can be applied to both alkylator compound-treated or photochemical treated leukocytes. A. Dose Response Kinetics of Leukocytes in vitro i). Limiting Dilution Assay (LDA)
This assay directly measures the number of clonable T cells, which correlates directly in vivo with the incidence and severity of GVHD (Kernan, N.A. et al, Blood 68:770-773, 1986). LDA was used by the FDA to set the current guideline for gamma irradiation of blood products. This assay is conducted according to the procedure of
Pelsynski, M. et al, Blood 83:1683-1689, 1994. Briefly, human leukocytes are assayed for the number of proliferating cells after PCT treatment with different concentrations of drug and a constant dose of light. Lethally γ-irradiated pooled allostimulator cells are used to stimulate growth. Controls for proliferation include untreated leukocytes (as positive control for proliferation) and pre-PCT leukocytes that have been lethally γ-irradiated
(negative control). Growth is measured by the number of isolated proliferating colonies.
A correlation between the dose used and the number of cells that are proliferation-inhibited is determined for human leukocytes. The dose response obtained from this experiment is expected to be similar to the one obtained for the leukocytes in platelet concentrates.
LDA was performed as follows. Leukocytes were isolated from peripheral blood by leukophoresis. Viable T-cells were stimulated to proliferate in wells of microtiter plates containing RPMI medium supplemented with fetal bovine serum (FBS), phytohemagglutinin (PHA), recombinant interleukin-2 (rIL-2) and T-cell growth factor (TCGF). Each well also contained 105 allostimulator cells prepared from a pool of
PBMCs from ten individuals and irradiated with 5000 cGy of gamma irradiation.
Leukocytes from each untreated control sample were diluted in two independent series. Aliquots of 100 μL containing in one series 105, 104, 103, 102, 101 and 10° cells or in a second series 300, 100, 33, 11 and 4 cells were plated per well. Each dilution was plated in ten replicates. An 11 mL aliquot of the photochemically treated sample containing 1.1 x 107 total leukocytes was cultured to detect viable T-cells. Aliquots of
100 μL from this sample were plated undiluted into 110 wells.
The microtiter plates were incubated in a CO2 incubator at 37°C for 3 weeks. After
0.5, 1, and 2 weeks of incubation, each well was fed with additional TCGF, FBS, rIL-2 and PHA. At the end of the 3 -week incubation period, each well was scored for the presence of T-cell clones. Wells with one or more T-cell clones were scored positive.
Wells with no T-cell clones were scored negative. The T-cell frequency for each sample was calculated using a minimum chi square analysis based on the Poisson distribution. The T-cell reduction factor was calculated using the formula: T-cell reduction factor = fcontroi/ftreated, where fCOntroi and ftreated are T-cell frequencies for the control and treated samples, respectively.
Control aliquots were either not treated or were treated with UVA only or S-59 only. One aliquot was irradiated with the clinical dose of 2500 cGy of gamma. To the remaining aliquots, S-59 was added to final concentrations ranging from 10"4 μM to 150 μM. They were then illuminated at a UV light dose ranging from 10'3 to 100 Joules/cm .
ii). Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) Assay
This assay, also known as the MLC test is conducted according to the procedure of Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 77:235-239, 1981 and Kraemer, K.H. et al, J. Inv. Derm. 76:80-87, 1981. For a review of the rationale and controls in this assay, see Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Daniel P. Stites, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G. Parslow (eds.), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, CT, 1994, pp. 246-247. It indirectly measures the DNA synthesis induced in lymphocytes by allostimulation. When the lymphocytes of 2 HLA-disparate individuals are combined in tissue culture, the cells enlarge, synthesize DNA, and proliferate, whereas HLA-identical cells remain quiescent. The DNA synthesis induced is determined through the incorporation of 3H-thymidine into the nucleic acid inside the proliferating cells. Cells are then harvested, washed free of unbound radioactivity and counted in a beta counter for internalized radioactivity.
The leukocytes are assayed for their responder and stimulator functions in one-way MLR. The standard, appropriate positive and negative controls are included. The responder function is assayed by incubating responder cells with lethally γ-irradiated pooled human leukocytes (stimulator cells). The stimulator function of the treated leukocytes (treated by PCT or other alkylator compounds) is determined, after they have been lethally γ-irradiated to block thymidine uptake, by incubating with normal pooled human leukocytes. The results obtained as a function of treatment dose are compared to a two-way MLR. Although the MLR will provide a subset of the information provided by LDA, it is able to provide information on the ability of treated leukocytes to stimulate other cells.
Stimulation by treated leukocytes in an MLR can be used as a model for the induction of an immune response against leukemia, activated by the DLI in a BMT transfused patient. In that case, the immune response against leukemia (GVL effect) may be launched by the host or donor cells present in the BMT.
B. Phenotypic Characterization of Treated Leukocytes i). Surface Antigenic Marker Expression
The effect of PCT or alkylator treatment on expression of surface antigenic markers is determined through the use of the appropriate fluorescently labeled antibodies (Pharmingen) and standard FACS-SCAN analysis.. The presence of antigenic markers, CD2, CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD18, CD25, CD69 and CD16/CD56, which are known to be involved in interactions associated with T-cell and NK cell activation and immune function, will be determined as a function of treatment dose, through the use of the appropriate fluorescently labeled antibodies (Pharmingen) and standard FACS-SCAN analysis as described in Coligan, J.E. et al, Current Protocols in Immunology: Current Protocols. New York, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991. Stability of surface molecules under the treatment conditions is not expected to be influenced given the mild nature of PCT and related treatments on proteins; the induction of their expression is, however, expected to be dose dependent.
See Example 14 for characterization of treated human lymphocytes with respect to proliferation, surface marker expression, cytokine synthesis and cytotoxic activity.
ii) Leukemia Cell Line Lysis
To assay for a direct GVL effect induced by treated cells, the cytolytic ability is investigated against a series of human and mouse leukemia cell lines (available from ATCC). The experiment is conducted according to the conditions of Jiang, Y.Z. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 8:233-238, 1991. Leukemia cells are labeled under standard conditions with 51Cr as described in Coligan, J.E. et al, Current Protocols in Immunology: Current Protocols. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1991. Any lysis achieved will be measured by the release of 51Cr radioactivity in the supernatant and compared to controls for background and total lysis. The effect of the treatment dose on the cytolytic ability of treated T-cells is monitored. The experiment is performed by adding increasing amounts of treated leukocytes to see if lysis occurs. The experiment can be repeated with subsets of T-cells. Although direct lysis of the leukemia lines provides a direct mechanism for the GVL effect, lack thereof may imply an indirect mechanism for the induction of the GVL effect by DLI. Therefore, alternatively, cytotoxic activity can be determined by measuring cytokine production, e.g., IFN-γ, IL-2 or GM-CSF production.
iii) Viability of Cells in Vivo To assess the viability of treated cells in vivo, after treatment at varying doses, male mouse leukocytes are infused in female syngeneic or allogeneic recipients. Presence of the treated cells in circulation is monitored through the use of a PCR procedure (Goodarzi, M.O. et al, Transfusion 35:145-149, 1995) applied on blood samples taken at the desired time points after the splenocyte infusion. This procedure detects the presence of a Y- chromosome-specific gene sequence present only in the male (donor) cells and has a sensitivity of 1-5 cells per 50 μL of host blood. This experiment will determine the effect on the clearance of the infused cells in a living animal as well as the relationship between the treatment dose and cell circulation in vivo. The viability of treated cells in vivo can also be monitored by PKH-26 labeling of the leukocytes before infusion as described in Johnson et al. Scand. J. Immunol. 45:511-514, 1997.
C. Quantitative and qualitative characterization of cytokine synthesis
Quantitative and qualitative cytokine measurements are conducted through the use of commercially available Elisa kits (R&D Systems) in culture supernatants following co cultivation of effector cells with stimulator cells. Assays are performed according to the instructions provided by the Elisa manufacturer. Results are evaluated by comparing absorbance measurements for each sample to a standard curve generated by cytokine standards supplied with each assay kit. Cytokine measurements are performed on treated leukocytes as a function of the compound concentration and, in the case of PCT, of the light dose, as well as the time interval between treatment and measurement. IL-1 , IL-2,
IL-4, IL-10, IFN-γ cytokines are measured because of their established role in T-cell activation and GVHD/GVL.
Measurement of cytokine synthesis by treated leukocytes is important in determining the capability of the cells to function as inducers of an immune response through their production; it also serves as a measure of biochemical function and protein synthesis.
See Example 14 for characterization of treated human lymphocytes with respect to proliferation, surface marker expression, cytokine synthesis and cytotoxic activity. D. Use of an in vivo murine model to demonstrate inhibition of GVHD and induction of a GVL effect
Mice are a well established model for studying graft vs host disease and graft versus leukemia effects. In order to differentially assess the effect of treated leukocytes on
GVHD and GVL, the transplantation murine model described in Johnson, B.D. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 11 :329-336, 1993, and in Johnson, B.D. et al, Blood 85:3302-3312, 1995, is used. In this model female AKR J mice (H-2 ) were sublethally irradiated (9 Gy) and then given 107BM cells plus 3 X 107 spleen cells from MHC -matched female B10.BR donors (H-2k). This treatment has been shown to result in acute GVHD clinical symptoms and death within 50 days. Elimination of the splenocytes from the transfusion results in complete survival of mixed chimeras, while no BMT results in 50% mortality. In this Example, mouse splenocytes are subjected to treatment before transfusion to test the inhibition of GVHD by the treatment, as measured by mortality, and also to provide the lowest dose to inhibit the onset of GVHD. Splenocytes are the accepted substitute for blood leukocytes in mice since the volume of blood in mice is too small for such experiments.
To assess the GVL reactivity of treated cells, 21 days post BMT, the recipients are infused with, for example, PA allogeneic splenocytes and then challenged 7 days later with AKR leukemia cells. Infusion of the mice with 5 X 104 AKR leukemia cells after recovery from BMT (28 days) is known to result in leukemia and 95% mortality 25 days after the leukemia challenge (Johnson, B.D. et al, Transplantation 54:104-112, 1992). On the contrary, infusion with allogeneic splenocytes 21 days after BMT has been shown to induce a GVL effect upon challenge with AKR cells 7 days later. This course of action results in 70% survival after 70 days. If prevention of GVHD has been demonstrated, treatment of the splenocytes before transfusion will allow the detection of induction of GVL in the absence of GVHD. This is measured by the survival rate of treated splenocyte-infused BMT recipients, which were challenged with AKR cells.
The effect of DLI using treated leukocytes on the survival of a leukemic challenge is tested as a function of the treatment dose and compared with a control group where infusion of untreated splenocytes is performed. The surviving mice are tested for chimerism and leukemic load through the use of a reported PCR assay as described in Johnson, B.D. et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 11 :329-336, 1993). In this experimental model, a leukemic cause of death can be diagnosed by either white cell count or PCR analysis of the blood immediately before death, since leukemia will cause an expansion of the AKR leukemic cells. Primers specific to AKR leukemia cell specific markers will be used for the PCR analysis. Death from GVHD is diagnosed by low white cell count and spleen atrophy, as well as through characteristic clinical symptoms (fur and posture changes, sticky feces etc.). The efficacy of PA-DLI against minimal residual disease or higher tumor load is tested by injecting smaller or larger numbers of AKR leukemia cells.
Treatment of leukocytes according to the invention, for example by the PCT approach, is deemed to be efficient to induce a GVL effect if, under conditions which do not cause GVHD, it induces a statistically significant increase in the survival of the mice treated with the treated-cell DLI, after a leukemic challenge is administered. The genetic type of the surviving animals should also be completely chimeric as this has been associated in humans with a higher incidence of a disease-free long-term survival. Increase of survival will be easy to demonstrate within 100 days after the original BMT.
Splenocytes will be subjected to treatment under conditions described above for donor leukocytes.
See Example 15 for provision of GVL effect in the absence of GVHD by treated leukocytes in a murine model system.
Examples 7-12 The following specific examples are presented to illustrate the preparative methods for representative alkylator compounds useful in the method of this invention, to provide relevant data regarding the compounds useful to the practitioner, and to illustrate the manner in which the effectiveness of the compounds is determined. All NMR spectra were recorded on a Varian 200 MHz instrument in CDCI3 unless otherwise noted; chemical shifts are reported versus tetramethylsilane (TMS). IR spectra were recorded with a Perkin Elmer FTIR. HPLC was carried out with a YMC C8 column in a gradient mode using 5 mM aq. H3PO4 as mobile phase A and 5 mM CH CN as mobile phase B. Samples were prepared in DMSO or ethanol and kept at < 15 °C prior to injection.
Table 2 indicates the designation of compound number used for the various compounds. Table 2
Figure imgf000068_0001
Example 7
Synthesis of β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride (Compound IV,)
Step A. β-Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester
To a stirred solution of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-β-alanine (20.3 g, 107 mmol) and 4- methylmorpholine (13.0 mL, 12.0 g, 119 mmol) in dry THF (200 mL) at -15 °C under N2 was added isobutyl chloroformate (13.9 mL, 14.6 g, 107 mmol) resulting in the immediate formation of a white precipitate (4-methylmorpholine»HCl). The reaction mixture was stirred at -15 °C for 5 min. followed by the transfer of the reaction mixture to a flask containing a stirred solution of triethanolamine (48.3 g, 324 mmol) in dry THF (150 mL) at -15 °C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to 23 °C and stirred for an additional 1.5 h. followed by removal of the precipitate by vacuum filtration. The THF was then removed in vacuo from the filtrate and the remaining viscous yellow oil was partitioned between water (500 mL) and EtOAc (5 x 150 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent in vacuo gave 25.8 g
(75%>) of the desired product, β-Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2- hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester, as a pale yellow oil. ^H NMR: δ 5.32 (br s, 1 H), 4.18 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2H), 3.58 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 4 H), 3.37-3.23 (m, 2H), 2.80 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t. J = 5.1 Hz, 4
H), 2.51 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 1.41 (s, 9 H) The hydroxyl protons were not observed. 13C NMR: δ 173.0, 156.4, 79.8, 63.3, 60.2, 57.3, 54.1, 36.7, 35.3, 28.8.
Step B. β-Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino] ethyl ester
A stirred solution of the β-Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2- hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester from step A (22.7 g, 70.9 mmol) and imidazole (11.1 g, 163 mmol) in acetonitrile (70 mL) under N2 was cooled to 0 °C. Tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (534 mg, 3.54 mmol) was then added and the reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 5 min. at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to 23 °C and stirred for 2 h followed by removal of the resultant white precipitate (imidazole»HCl) by vacuum filtration. The acetonitrile was removed in vacuo from the filtrate and the remaining material was partitioned between saturated brine (600 mL) and EtOAc (3 x 200 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4.
Removal of solvent in vacuo gave 35.2 g (90%) of the desired product, β-Alanine, N-(tert- butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester, as a yellow oil. *H
NMR : δ 5.29 (br s, 1 H), 4.14 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.65 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 4 H), 3.37 (apparent q, 2 H), 2.85 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 2.71 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 4 H), 2.49 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.42 (s, 9 H), 0.88 (s, 18 H), 0.03 (s, 12 H); ^C NMR: δ 172.7, 156.3, 79.7, 63.3, 62.4, 57.7, 54.3, 36.7, 35.3, 28.9, 26.4, 18.7, -4.9.
Step C. β-Alanine, 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino] ethyl ester To a flask containing β-Alanine, N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl), 2-[bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester from step B (3.01 g, 5.48 mmol) was added neat trifluoroacetic acid (5 mL) resulting in the evolution of CO2 gas. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min. and the trifluoroacetic acid was removed in vacuo. The remaining material was partitioned between saturated NaHCO3 (100 mL) and EtOAc (3 x 30 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent in vacuo gave 2.45 g (100%)) of the desired product, β-Alanine, 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester, as a pale yellow oil. *H NMR: δ 4.12 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.63 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 4 H), 2.96 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.84 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 2.69 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 4 H), 2.44 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 2 H), 0.86 (s, 18 H), 0.03 (s, 12 H) The amine protons were not observed. 1 C NMR (CDCI3): δ 173.0, 63.4, 62.6, 57.9, 54.4,
38.4, 38.1, 26.4, 18.7, -4.9.
Step D. β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester The β-Alanine, 2-[bis(2-tert-butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester (736 mg, 1.64 mmol) was reacted with methyl 9-methoxyacridine-2-carboxylate (669 mg, 2.50 mmol) by stirring in 10 mL of CHCI3 for 12.5 h at room temperature. The precipitate (acridone) was then filtered off and the filtrate partitioned between saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (100 mL) and CHCI3 (3 x 35 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.61 g of viscous brown oil. Deprotection of the resultant diol was carried out by dissolving the crude intermediate in 3.0 mL of THF under N2 and, upon cooling to 0 °C, treating with HF/pyridine (1.0 mL). The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature with stirring for 1 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was partitioned between saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (100 mL) and CHC13 (3 x 35 mL). The combined organic layers were dried and concentrated to give 649 mg of a brownish yellow solid. Preparative TLC (C-18, CH3CN) gave a
20 % yield of the desired diol, β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2- hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester (>80% pure by HPLC); 1H NMR: δ 8.82 (s, 1 H), 8.21-7.94 (m, 2 H), 7.94-7.72 (m, 2 H), 7.59 (apparent t, 1 H), 7.23 (apparent t, 1 H), 4.30-4.18 (m, 2 H), 4.18- 4.05 (m, 2 H), 3.89 (s, 3 H), 3.69-3.50 (m, 4 H), 2.92-2.73 (m, 4 H), 2.73-2.55 (m, 4 H) The amine and hydroxyl protons were not observed. Step E. β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride
Conversion of β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2- hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester to the dichloro compound was achieved by a method similar to that of Peck, et al. (J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1959, 57: 3984). A yellow solution of the product from step D (41 mg, 0.090 mmol) in neat SOC12 (6 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The SOCb was then removed in vacuo to give a yellow solid (dihydrochloride salt). The material was then partitioned between saturated NaHCO3 (50 mL) and CH2CI2 (3 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent in vacuo gave 35.4 mg of the dichloro compound free base as an orange gum. *H NMR: δ 8.82 (s, 1 H), 8.20-7.83 (m, 4 H), 7.5 (apparent t, 1 H), 7.25 (apparent t, 1 H), 4.36-4.15 (m, 4 H), 3.93 (s, 3 H), 3.48 (t, j = 6.9 Hz, 4 H), 3.06-2.77 (m, 4 H), 2.86 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4 H) The amine proton was not observed. 13C NMR: δ 172.3, 166.6, 155.2, 146.5, 144.6, 133.1, 131.6, 128.7, 124.6, 124.3, 116.1, 114.3, 63.7, 57.2, 53.5, 52.9, 46.3, 42.5, 35.2. No other carbons were observed. The HCl salt was precipitated from
CH2CI2 by addition of 1 M HCl in ether to give β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2- [bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride (Compound IV,) as a yellow solid (81 % pure by HPLC).
β-Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride, (Compound
V) was prepared in a similar manner. Thus using 9-methoxyacridine in place of methyl 9- methoxyacridine-2-carboxylate in Step D, the intermediate diol was obtained (7.1%) as a yellow oil (74% pure by HPLC). *H NMR: δ 8.14 (d, j = 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.93 (d, j = 8.6 Hz, 2 H), 7.52 (apparent t, 2 H), 7.23 (apparent t, 2 H), 4.36-4.08 (m, 4 H), 3.76-3.5 (m, 4 H), 3.08-2.60 (m, 8 H) The amine and hydroxyl protons were not observed.
A solution of the intermediate diol (37.3 mg, 0.0793 mmol) in thionyl chloride (4.0 mL) was stirred at 23 °C for 7.5 h. The thionyl chloride was removed in vacuo to give a yellow oil. The material was dissolved in ethanol (~4 mL) and the solvent removed in vacuo. The material was then dissolved in CH2CI2 (4 mL) and solvent removed in vacuo; this step was repeated twice. The material was then triturated with hexane (3 x 4 mL) to give 40.0 mg (42 % pure by HPLC) of the product in the form of a yellow hydroscopic glassy solid. Some of the material was converted to the free amine for analytical purposes by partitioning between saturated NaHCO3 and CH2CI2 followed by drying the combined organic layers over Na2SO4 and removal of the solvent in vacuo. !H NMR: δ 8.21-8.00 (m, 4 H), 7.66 (apparent t, 2 H), 7.38 (apparent t, 2 H), 4.26-4.12 (m, 2 H), 4.12-3.98 (m, 2 H), 3.43 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4 H), 2.96-2.68 (m, 8 H) The amine proton was not 5 observed.
Following the above procedure but replacing N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-β-alanine with N- (tert-butoxycarbonyl)-4-aminobutyric acid led to the preparation of 4-aminobutyric acid N-[(2- carbomethoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound VI (78% pure by HPLC) . 1H NMR: δ 8.89 (s, 1), 8.12 (apparent t, 2), 7.93-7.80 (m, 2), 7.59
(apparent q, 1), 7.36-7.20 (m, 1), 4.16 (t, 2, J = 5.7 Hz), 4.07-3.92 (m, 2), 3.97 (s, 3), 3.46 (t, 4, J = 6.9 Hz), 2.93-2.80 (m, 6), 2.60 (t, 2, J = 6.5 Hz), 2.29-2.12 (m, 2) The amine proton was not observed.
5 Example 8
Substituting the triethanolamine in Example 7, Step A with 3-[N,N-Bis(2-tert- butyldimethylsilyloxyethyl)]aminopropanol, and then continuing from step C, led to the preparation of β-Alanine, N-(2-carbomethoxy-acridin-9-yl), 3-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]propyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound VIII, (63% pure by HPLC). iH NMR : δ 8.91 (s, 1), 8.20-7.93 (m, 4), 7.18 (apparent t, 1), 7.39 (apparent t, 1), 4.30 (m, 4), 3.96 (s, 3), 3.48 (t, 4, J = 6.9 Hz), 2.88-2.60 (m, 2), 2.83 (t, 4, J = 6.9 Hz), 2.62 (t, 2, J = 6.7 Hz), 1.85-1.68 (m, 2) The amine proton was not observed.
5 Example 9
The compounds synthesized in Example 7 can also be prepared by the following method: Synthesis of β -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride (Compound V): Method II
0 Step A: β -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), methyl ester hydrochloride 9-Chloroacridine (11.7 g, Organic Synthesis, Coll. Vol III, pg. 57), β -alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (9.9 g) and sodium methoxide (3.26 g) were combined and 60 mL of methanol was added. The mixture was stirred with a magnetic stirrer and refluxed for 5.5 h . Heat was removed and the suspension was filtered while warm (<35 °C). The solid salts were rinsed with about 10 mL of additional methanol and the combined dark green filtrate was concentrated to give 21 g of a moist greenish-yellow solid.
The solid was dissolved in 350 mL of boiling 2-propanol and allowed to crystallize at room temperature. The resulting crystals were rinsed with about 15 mL of 2-propanol and 15 mL of hexane, then air dried to give 15.5 g of bright yellow product, β -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), methylester hydrochloride, (yield 78.5%). 1 H NMR: δ 1.9 (br s, 2H); 3.24 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H); 3.76
(s, 3H); 4.45 (br s, 2H); 7.23 (app. t, J=8 Hz, 2H); 7.49 (app. t, J=8 Hz, 2H); 8.11 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H); 8.30 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H); 9.68 (br s, 0.5 H). IR: 1574 (s), 1691 (s), 1726 (s), 2336 (m), 2361 (m), 3227 (m).
Step B: β -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride
The β -Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), methyl ester hydrochloride, from Step A, (5.00 g) was partitioned between toluene (750 mL), saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (200 mL) and H2O (50 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted again with toluene (3 x 250 mL) and the organic layers were combined and washed with saturated aqueous Na2CO3 (50 mL). The volume of toluene was reduced to about 100 mL by rotary evaporation. Triethanolamine (30 mL) was then added to form a partially immiscible system. A solution of NaOMe (50 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) was then added. Solvents were quickly removed from the reaction mixture by rotary evaporation with agitation at room temperature. After the solvent was removed the reaction mixture was left under vacuum for another l-1.5h to give a syrupy solution. The crude mixture was partitioned between CH2CI2 (200 mL) and brine (200 mL) to remove excess triethanolamine. The brine layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (5 x 100 mL). The organic layers were combined and washed with brine (50 mL) then extracted with 0.5M HCl (2 x 100 mL). The aqueous acid layers were combined and washed with CH2CI2 (50 mL). The acid solution was made basic with powdered K2CO3(s) in the presence of CH2CI2 (200 mL). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted again with CH2CI2 (5 x 100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (50 mL), dried with anhydrous Na2SO4(s), and stripped to give crude diol free amine (5.02 g), a sticky yellow gum. This material was identical by NMR to that prepared in Example 1 by an alternate procedure.
A portion of the above crude (0.400g) was vigorously stirred with isopropanol (100 mL) and acidified with 1 M HCl in ether. The slurry was chilled and the first precipitate was 5 discarded. After removing half the solvent the second set of crystals gave β-Alanine, N-(acridin-
9-yl), 2-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride as a bright yellow crystalline solid
(0.200g) >95 % pure by HPLC. 1H NMR: δ 8.11 (apparent t, 4 H), 7.69 (apparent t, 2 H), 7.41 (apparent t, 2 H), 4.23 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2 H), 4.03 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 3.58 (t, J = 5.2 Hz, 4 H), 2.73 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2 H), 2.70 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H) 2.68 (t, J = 5.2 Hz, 4 H). The amine and hydroxyl 0 protons were not observed. 13C NMR: δ 173.3, 151.7, 149.4, 130.5, 129.5, 124.0, 123.4, 118.4,
63.5, 60.1, 57.3, 54.0, 46.6, 35.8.
Step C: β-Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)arnino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride
5 SOCb (0.5 mL) was added to a stirred suspension of β-Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2- hydroxyethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride from Step B (113 mg, 0.24 mmol) in CH3CN (0.5 mL). The resultant yellow solution was stirred at 23 °C for 16 h followed by removal of the volatiles in vacuo. The remaining orange oil was dissolved in EtOH (~2 mL) and the EtOH was removed in vacuo to give a yellow solid. The material was then triturated with hexane (2 x 3 mL). 0 Removal of residual solvents in vacuo gave 123 mg of the desired material, β-Alanine, N-(acridin-
9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride, (93 % pure by HPLC) as a yellow solid. ΪH NMR: δ 8.09 (apparent t, J = 8.8 Hz, 4 H), 7.66 (apparent t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 7.38 (apparent t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2 H), 4.14 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.00 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, 2 H), 3.43 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4 H), 2.87 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4 H), 2.77 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.69 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, 2 H). The amine 5 proton was not observed. 13C NMR : δ 173.0, 151.5, 149.4, 130.5, 129.6, 124.1, 123.4, 118.6,
63.5, 57.3, 53.5, 46.7, 42.5, 35.7. IR (KBr pellet of HCl salt): 3423, 3236, 2939, 2879, 1736, 1634, 1586, 1572, 1540, 1473, 1272, 1173 cm"1.
Example 10 0 β-alanine, N-(4-methoxy-acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride,
Compound IX. β-alanine, N-(4-methoxy-acridin-9-yl), methyl ester was prepared by mixing 1.4 g (5.84 mmol) of 4,9-dimethoxyacridine, 0.89 g (6.42 mmol) of β-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride and 20 mL of methanol and then heating to reflux for 12h under N2- The reaction was then concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in CHCl3-isopropanol (50 mL, 4:1 v/v), and washed with 50% NH4OH (2 x 25 mL) and brine (1 x 25 mL). The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield 1.24 g (68%) of the methyl ester (>74% purity by HPLC) as a yellow oil; Rf (SiO2, ethyl acetate) = 0.25; IR (thin film): 3363, 2947, 1730, 1611, 1573, 1518,
1484, 1463, 1423, 1420, 1246, 1170, 1081 cm"1 ; H NMR: δ 2.70 (t, 2H, J=5.7 Hz), 3.74 (s, 3H), 4.00 (t, 2H, J=6.3 Hz), 4.11 (s, 3H), 6.98 (d, IH, J=7.4 Hz), 7.36 (m, 2H), 7.65 (m, 2H), 8.12 (d, 2H, J=8.5 Hz); 13C NMR): δ 35.7, 46.9, 52.3, 56.5, 107.2, 115.3, 119.8, 123.5, 124.1, 130.0,
151.4, 173.6.
This was converted to the diol under conditions described in Example 3, Step B to afford 647 mg of a yellow oil. HPLC analysis of the crude mixture indicated a yield of 85%(λ = 278 nm); Rf (SiO2, 20% methanol-ethyl acetate) = 0.17; IR (thin film): 3337, 2947, 2828, 1726, 1616, 1569, 1522, 1484, 1463, 1420, 1348, 1250, 1174, 1127, 1081, 1043 cm"1; iH NMR: δ 2.7
(m, 8H), 3.55 (m, 4H), 3.97-4.08 (m, 2H), 4.08 (s, 3H), 4.19 (t, 2H, J=5.5 Hz), 6.96 (d, IH, J=7.4 Hz), 7.29 (m, 2H), 7.61 (m, 2H), 8.10 (m, 2H); 13C NMR: δ 36.0, 46.9, 53.7, 56.4, 57.1, 60.1, 63.3, 107.4, 115.7, 119.1, 119.6, 123.2, 123.5, 123.9, 128.5, 130.0, 140.8, 147.4, 151.6, 151.7, 154.3, 173.3. This was converted to β-alanine, N-(4-methoxy-acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2- chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride with thionyl chloride as described in Example 3, Step C. Flash filtration (Siθ2) of the crude product using ethyl acetate followed by 10% methanol-ethyl acetate gave 58 mg of a yellow oil after apparent on-column degradation of some product; Rf (Sioux, ethyl acetate) = 0.26; IR (thin film): 3405, 2955, 2828, 1726, 1616, 1577, 1518, 1463, 1416, 1348, 1246, 1174, 1123, 1081, 1013 cm-1; ΪH NMR: δ 2.69-2.99 (m, 8H),
3.45 (t, 4H, J=6.7 Hz), 4.03 (m, 2H), 4.09 (s, 3H), 4.16 (t, 2H, J=5.9 Hz), 6.97 (d, IH, J=7.7 Hz), 7.32 (m, 2H), 7.65 (m, 2H), 8.12 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz).
The dihydrochloride salt could be isolated in crude form by concentrating the reaction in vacuo with azeotropic removal of excess thionyl chloride (2 x 5 mL toluene). HPLC analysis indicated complete consumption of the starting material and 4-methoxy acridone (Rj 22.3 min) to be the major impurity. lU NMR (CD3OD): δ 3.18 (t, 2H, J=6.4 Hz), 3.71 (m, 6H), 4.04 (m, 4H), 4.18 (s, 3H), 4.51 (m, 2H), 7.17 (m, 2H), 7.56 (m, 2H), 7.91-8.15 (m, 2H), 8.55 (d, 1H, J=8.8 Hz).
Similarly prepared from 3-chloro-9-methoxy-4-methylacridine was β-alanine. N-(3- chloro-4-methylacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride. Compound X. *H NMR of the free base: δ 7.96-8.17 (m, 3H), 7.29-7.52 (m, 3H), 4.19 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, 2H),
4.00 (s, 3H), 3.89 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 2H), 3.47 (t, j = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.91 (t, j = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.83 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (t, j = 5.5 Hz, 2H).
Similarly prepared from 6-chloro-2,9-dimethoxyacridine was β-alanine, N-(6-chloro-2- methoxyacridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound XIII. iH NMR of the free base: δ 7.96-8.17 (m, 3H), 7.29-7.52 (m, 3H), 4.19 (t, j = 5.8 Hz, 2H), 4.00
(s, 3H), 3.89 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 2H), 3.47 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.91 (t, j = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.83 (t, j = 5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (t, J = 5.5 Hz, 2H).
Example 11 β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound XI.
Step A β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]ethyl ester
A slurry of β-alanine ethyl ester hydrochloride (1.99 g, 12.9 mmol), K2CO3 (6.0g, 43.4 mmol) and iodoethyl triisopropylsilyl ether (9.47 g, 28.9 mmol) in acetonitrile (175 mL) were refluxed for 5-7 days. After vacuum evaporation of the solvent, the solid was triturated with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with dilute Na2CO3( q.), then with brine and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (1 :4 EtOAc / hexane) to provide 5.60 g of the oil, β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]ethyl ester,
(83.1%). !H NMR: δ 4.12 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H), 3.73 (t, j = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.92 (t, j = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.70 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 4H), 2.46 (t, j = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.4 - 0.9 (m, 45H, includes triplet at 1.25 (3H) and singlets at 1.06 and 1.05).
Step B β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]- The β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)-ethyl] ethyl ester from Step A above (5.60 g, 10.8 mmol) and lithium hydroxide (0.59 g, 14.1 mmol) were stirred in ethanol and refluxed for 3h. The solvent was removed and the crude product was partitioned between CH2CI2 and dilute NaHCO3(aq.). The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and stripped to give β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]- as a pale yellow oil (5.03 g,
95.1% yield). ! H NMR: δ 3.90 (t, J = 5.5 Hz, 4H), 3.04 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 2H), 2.92 (t, J = 5.5 Hz, 4H), 2.50 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H), 1.06 (s, 42H).
Step C β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2 -hydroxy ethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester
The β-Alanine, [N, N-bis(2-triisopropylsilyloxy)ethyl]- from Step B above (51.0 mg, 0.104 mmol) was stirred under N2 in CH2CI2 (1 mL). While chilling on an ice bath, SOCI2 (0.5 mL) was added dropwise and the reaction was stirred for 2.25 h. After stripping the reaction mixture to remove excess SOCI2, dry CH2CI2 (0.5 mL) was added and the solution was chilled in an ice bath while under N2. A chilled slurry of 9-(3-hydroxy)propylamino-6-chloro-2-methoxy- acridine (29.0 mg, 91.5 mmol) in CH2CI2 (1 mL) was added. After 0.5 h the mixture was partitioned between CH2CI2 and aqueous NaHCO3. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried with anhydrous Na2SO4, and stripped. The gum obtained was triturated with hexane and the hexane extract was stripped to obtain a very crude mixture (53.5 mg) of triisopropylsilyl protected starting material and product.
To remove the triisopropylsilyl groups, a portion of the crude protected diol (33.1 mg) was stirred in ice cold THF (1 mL). After the addition of HF/pyridine (0.5 mL) the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature under a N2 filled balloon for 2.5 h. The reaction mix was partitioned between CH2CI2 and NaHCO3(aq.) and the organic layer was washed several times with dilute
NaHCO3(aq.) to remove excess HF/pyridine. After preliminary drying with brine, then with anhydrous Na2SO4, the solvent was stripped off to give crude diol (13.1 mg).
This was combined with additional crude diol (5.0 mg) and purified by C-18 preparative TLC with 95 CH2CI2 / 5 iPA / 1 TFA as eluent to obtain the diol TFA salt. After partitioning the salt between CH2CI2 and NaHCO3(aq.), the organic layer was dried with brine, then with anhydrous Na2SO4, and stripped to give the free base of the diol, β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2- hydroxy ethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester, (5.0 mg). *H NMR: δ 7.92-8.25 (m, 3H), 7.23-7.47 (m, 3H), 4.30 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H)), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.81 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 2H), 3.64 (t, J = 4.9 Hz, 4H), 2.86 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (t, J = 4.9 Hz, 4H), 2.51 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2H), 2.04 (apparent quintet, 2H).
Step D β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound XI.
The β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9- yl)amino]propyl ester from above (4.0 mg, 0.0073 mmol) was dissolved in CH2CI2 (1 mL) and chilled in an ice/water bath. Ice cold SOCI2 (0.1 mL) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir for 4 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stripped to remove solvent, triturated with hexane, and partitioned between CH2CI2 and NaHCO3(aq.). After the organic layer was dried with brine, then with anhydrous Na2SO4 and stripped, the dichloro- compound was obtained as a yellow gum. 'H NMR: δ 7.8-8.2 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.5 (m, 3H), 4.35 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2H), 3.85- 4.10 (3.99, s, OMe and 3.9-4.0, m, NHCH2, total 5H), 3.48 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4H), 2.9-3.0 (m, 6H),
2.49 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H), 2.1-2.3 (m, 2H).
The free amine was stirred in chilled CH2CI2, acidified with 1M HCl in ether and stripped with a few drops of methanol to obtain the desired compound, β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2- chloroethyl)], 3-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9-yl)amino]propyl ester dihydrochloride (2.5 mg), (3.5 mg, 81 %), as a yellow solid.
In the same manner as given in the foregoing Step C, but using 6-chloro-9-(2- hydroxy)ethylamino-2-methoxy-acridine instead of 6-chloro-9-(3-hydroxy)propylamino-2- methoxy-acridine, was prepared the analogous diol. ^H NMR : δ 7.96-8.13 (m, 3H), 7.20-7.47 (m, 3H), 4.76 (t, J = 4.9 Hz, 2H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 3.92-4.14 (m, 2H), 3.60 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 4H), 2.78 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H), 2.63 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 4H), 2.45 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H). By analogy to Step D this was converted to β-Alanine, [N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)], 2-[(6-chloro-2-methoxyacridin-9- yl)amino]ethyl ester dihydrochloride, Compound XII. 1H NMR: δ 7.94-8.20 (m), 7.20-7.50 (m), 4.42 (CH2OC=O), 3.90-4.10 (OCH3, NHCH2), 3.46 (CH2C1), 2.82 (N(CH2)3), 2.39-2.56 (CH C=O). Example 12
[N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)]-2-aminoethyl 4, 5', 8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate hydrochloride, Compound XIV
Step A: [N,N-Bis(2-hydroxyethyl)]-2-aminoethyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate A slurry of methyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate (250 mg, 0.832 mmol), triethanolamine (12 mL) and 1M HCl in ether (2 mL) were stirred at 100°C for 2 h. The resulting clear brown solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and partitioned between CH2CI2 and saturated NaHCO3(aq.). The organic layer was rinsed several times with saturated NaHCO3(aq). After drying with anhydrous Na2SO4, solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was partitioned between CH2C12 and 1M aq. HCl. The aqueous layer was rinsed several times with CH2C12 and then made basic with K2CO3(s) in the presence of the organic solvent. The organic layer containing the neutral product was rinsed with water several times, then dried and concentrated. A repetition of the acid-base extraction procedure gave the desired product as a beige solid (84.3 mg, 24.3%): Η NMR: δ 7.53 (s, IH), 6.24 (s, IH), 4.23 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 3.56 (t,
J = 5.3 Hz, 4H), 2.82 (t, J = 5.4 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t, J = 5.3 Hz, 4H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.51 (d, J = l.l Hz, 3H), 2.47 (s, 3H).
Step B: [N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)]-2-aminoethyl 4,5',8-trimethyl-4'-psoralenacetate hydrochloride
Thionyl chloride (0.2 mL) was added to an ice cold mixture of the above diol
(9.8 mg, 0.023 mmol) in CH2C1 (1 mL) and stirred at room temperature overnight under nitrogen. The resulting slurry was concentrated then triturated with hexane to give the desired product (6.2 mg, 53.9%) as an off-white solid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.71 (s, IH), 6.28 (s, IH), 4.56 (t, J = 4.8 Hz, 2H), 3.95 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 4H), 3.89 (s, 2H), 3.60-3.83 (m,
6H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.53 (s, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H).
Example 13
Exemplary BMT light or minitransplant protocol
The patient presenting CLL is given a nonablative preparative regimen prior to transplantation with allogeneic peripheral blood stem cells. Transplantation is followed by support with DLI as necessary to achieve a maximum graft-versus-malignancy effect. The mildly toxic preparative regimen is fludarabine (FAMP)-based and is modified according to malignancy type. For advanced and previously treated CLL, the patient is given FAMP at 300 mg/m2/dx3 with cyclophosphamide at 30 mg/m2/dx3. Richter and Large Cell Lymphoma (LCL) are treated with a regimen consisting of FAMP 30 mg/m2/dx2, cisplatinum 25 mg/m2/d/CIx4, and Ara-c 0.5 gm mg/m2/dx2. With the exception of treatment for LCL, no GVHD prophylaxis is given. The regimen is intended to generate chimerisms and allow engraftment while decreasing the toxicity of conventional induction therapy. DLI can be given 1 month post-transplant to boost engraftment. Successful engraftment allows for subsequent DLI administered as necessary to enhance a graft vs. leukemia effect and expedite immune recovery.
Example 14
In vitro studies with human peripheral blood lymphocytes
To characterize a particular type of treated cell population, several features of human peripheral blood lymphocytes (PBLs), subjected to PCT and cultured in vitro, were examined. These included viability, T-cell proliferation, cytokine synthesis and secretion, surface antigen expression, in vitro cytotoxicity and Fas ligand expression.
Viability
PBLs subjected to 10 nM S-59 at 3 J/cm2 UVA were assayed for viability by trypan blue exclusion. Survival was 75% after 2 days, 50% after three days, and 25% after 4 days. In related experiments, a dose-dependent survival of treated lymphocytes was observed.
Proliferation
Lymphocyte proliferation was measured by 3H-thymidine incorporation into the DNA of allostimulated T-cells. Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were isolated from three donors, pooled, γ-irradiated (2500 cGy) to prevent autostimulation, and used as stimulator cells in a MLR. PBMCs isolated from a fourth donor were used as responder cells. Responder cells were treated with 0.05, 0.5 or 5 nM 4'-(4-amino-2-oxa) butyl-4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen ("S-59") at 3 J/cm2 UVA and co-cultured with stimulator cells. Control, untreated responder cells were also co-cultured with the stimulator cells.
After 6 days of culture, 3H-thymidine was added to the cultures, and, one day later, cells were harvested and cell samples were analyzed by scintillation counting to measure uptake of 3H thymidine. Figure 8 shows that proliferation of treated leukocytes, as measured by 3H-thymidine uptake in a MLR, was eliminated in a dose-dependent manner between 0.1 nM and 10 nM S-59, with complete inhibition of proliferation at 10 nM S-59.
Proliferative ability of treated leukocytes was also analyzed by an alternative method, in which treated cells were activated by surface-bound anti-CD3 antibody. In this assay, PBMCs were either untreated, treated with 0.0001, 0.001 or 0.01 μM S-59 at a UVA dose of 3 J/cm2, or irradiated in the absence of S-59. Cells were then incubated at 37°C in 5% CO2 in plates to which anti-CD3 antibody had been attached, to induce polyclonal activation of T-cells, and H-thymidine incorporation was measured after 1 , 2 and 3 days of culture. The results, (Figure 9) show a dose-dependent reduction in proliferative capacity under all treatment conditions, and complete inhibition of proliferation at 10 nM
S-59.
Cytokine production
Human lymphocytes were cultured in a MLR as described in the previous section on analysis of proliferation. Responder cells were treated with different concentrations of
S-59 (0.05, 0.5 or 5 nM) at 3.0 J/cm2 UVA. Samples of the MLR cell culture medium were taken after 2, 4, 6, and 7 days of culture. These samples were tested for IL-2 and IFN-γ levels by sandwich enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay and the results were quantitated by spectrophotometry. Standard solutions were used for the construction of standard curves relating concentration (pg/ml) and absorbance, from which cytokine concentrations in the test samples were determined.
Analysis of IL-2 production is shown in Figure 10A. Secretion of IL-2 by untreated lymphocytes and by lymphocytes treated with lower concentrations of S-59 (i.e., 0.05 and 0.5 nM) peaked at 2 days in culture, and then declined due to consumption of IL-2 by proliferating lymphocytes in the population. By contrast, in lymphocytes treated with 5 nM S-59, IL-2 was not consumed by the non-proliferating leukocytes, and remained present in the medium, at fairly high levels, at days 4, 6 and 7.
The production of IFN-γ by stimulated PBMCs was unaffected or somewhat increased by treatment with S-59 + UVA. See Figure 10B. The combined results of the IL-2 and IFN-γ analyses show that, under conditions in which proliferation is inhibited, treated cells are nevertheless capable of synthesizing and secreting cytokines associated with T-cell activation. Surface antigen expression
Analysis of surface marker expression on treated lymphocytes was analyzed. Lymphocytes were obtained by Ficoll gradient centrifugation, and were activated through in vitro stimulation by surface-bound anti-CD3 antibody. Surface antigen expression by activated, treated lymphocytes was measured by fluorescence-activated cell sorting
(FACS) analysis, using fluorescent antibodies to CD69, CD25 (the IL-2 receptor), or CD40L. Expression was measured as a function of time after activation and compared to expression by untreated cells.
CD69 is an early marker of lymphocyte activation. Figure 11A shows that cells treated with either 1 nM or 10 nM S-59 + 3 J/cm2 UVA have surface CD69 levels similar to, or slightly higher than, those of untreated cells, for up to 48 hours post-treatment. Thus, although treated cells are unable to proliferate, signalling pathways related to activation remain functional.
CD 25 is the IL-2 receptor, and its expression is detected somewhat later (after activation) than that of CD69. Figure 1 IB shows that, in cells treated with either 1 nM or
10 nM S-59 + 3 J/cm2 UVA, surface CD25 levels are essentially unaffected, compared to untreated cells.
The CD40 ligand (CD40L) on T-cells recognizes the CD40 molecule expressed on the surface of B-cells as part of the T-cell activation process. Inhibition of CD40L expression on T-cells can induce cell unresponsiveness or anergy. Therefore, unperturbed expression of CD40L on T-cells after treatment is an indication of normal T-cell activation. The effect of PCT on expression of CD40L was examined following activation of treated cells with anti-CD3 antibody (Figure 12). The results of this analysis indicate that, for treatment conditions under which subsequent proliferative ability is abolished, CD40L expression by treated cells closely parallels that observed in untreated cells.
In conclusion, under conditions in which proliferation is severely reduced or completely inhibited (see Figures 8 and 9, this Example), expression of the early T-cell activation marker CD69, and the IL-2 receptor CD25 remain essentially unaffected; and CD40L levels parallel those of untreated cells. It should be noted that CD 69 is transiently expressed on lymphocytes upon antigenic or mitogenic stimulation and continuous expression of CD69 requires new transcription. Thus, observation of high CD69 levels in treated, nonproliferating cells further supports the notion that treatment does not irreversibly inhibit gene expression. Cytotoxic T-cell function
The effect of S-59 + UVA treatment of the lytic function of T-cells was evaluated by generating cytotoxic T-cells against gamma irradiation-inactivated allogeneic "stimulator" cells in a MLR. These cytotoxic T-cells were then tested for their ability to lyse 51Cr-labeled target cells that were obtained from the same donor used to provide the inactivated stimulator cells.
Generation of cytotoxic T-cells
Peripheral blood (100 ml) was removed from two donors, one designated the "stimulator" and the other, the "responder." PBMCs were isolated from both populations by Ficoll gradient centrifugation. Responder PBMCs were depleted of monocytes by placing them in a tissue culture flask, at a cell density of 5x106 cells/ml, for one hour. Stimulator PBMCs were γ-irradiated (2500cGy) to block cell division. Both the monocyte-depleted responders and the irradiated stimulators were separately resuspended in RPMI complete medium to a concentration of lxl 06 cells/ml. Equal volumes of responder and stimulator cell suspensions were then combined for MLR, and incubated at 37°C for 7 days in a 5% CO2 incubator.
Preparation of target cells
Peripheral blood (50 ml) was drawn from the same donor that provided the stimulator cells for MLR. PBMCs were isolated as above and resuspended at a concentration of 1 x 106 cells/ml in RPMI medium, then stimulated with 2 μg/ml PHA-M (phytohemagglutinin-M) and 10 Units/ml of recombinant IL-2 for 7 days at 37°C.
Labeling of target cells with 51Cr
Target cells were incubated in the presence of 200 μCi Na2 51CrO4 at 37°C for two hours, then washed three times to remove unincorporated label.
Photochemical treatment (PCT) of Responder cells
Responder cells (monocyte-depleted, as described above) were divided into four equal portions, each of which was resuspended in 30 ml of PBS containing 1% bovine serum albumin. S-59 was added to three of the portions to a final concentration of 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 μM; the remaining portion served as an untreated control. Samples containing S-59 were transferred into 30 ml 2410 blood bags and each was illuminated with 3 J/cm UVA on a Baxter/Fenwall UVA illumination device. CTL Assay
Cytotoxic T-lymphocyte (CTL) activity of the treated responder cell population was assayed as follows. The treated cells (or control untreated cells) were resuspended to a final concentration of 5 x 106 cells/ml in a final volume of 1 ml, and serial two-fold dilutions were made to obtain final concentrations of 2.5 x 106, 1.25 x 106 and 0.625 x 106 cells/ml. A 100 μl sample of the resuspended treated responder cells and of each treated responder cell dilution ("effector cells") was added to each of three wells of a round- bottom 96-well microtiter plate. A 100 μl sample of labeled target cells (prepared as described above), containing 5 x 103 cells, was then added to each well of effector cells, to give effector cel target cell ratios of 100:1, 50:1, 25:1 and 12.5:1, and the mixtures were incubated at 37°C for 4 hours. After the incubation, the plate was centrifuged for 5 min at 250 x g, and 100 μl of supernatant was removed from each well. The amount of 51Cr in the supernatants was quantitated on a gamma counter. Average 5ICr cpm, and standard deviation, for each triplicate set of wells was calculated. Controls
Unlabeled target cells were diluted and plated with labeled target cells, at the same ratios as the effector cells, to measure spontaneous release of 51Cr. Labeled target cells were also incubated with RPMI and 1% Triton X-100 (3 wells each) to measure maximal release of 51Cr. Average 5 lCr cpm, and standard deviation, for each triplicate set of wells was calculated.
Results
Figure 13 shows data for release of 51Cr at different effector :target (or unlabeled target: labeled target) ratios for treated and untreated leukocytes. These results indicate that cytolytic function is retained by leukocytes that have been treated with doses of S-59 and UVA that block proliferation. Thus, treated leukocytes that are unable to proliferate not only possess the same phenotype as untreated cells (as shown by surface marker and cytokine expression) but they also possess similar functional properties.
In summary, analysis of proliferation, surface marker expression, cytokine synthesis and CTL activity of treated leukocyte populations has revealed the following properties of the treated leukocytes :
1. Upon treatment, a dose-dependent inhibition of proliferative ability is observed.
2. Cytokine synthesis, cell surface antigen expression and in vitro cytotoxicity are retained by treated cells. Accordingly, populations of leukocytes treated as described herein, and equivalent cell populations, can facilitate engraftment of donor cells, for example, hematopoietic cells and hematopoietic stem cells, in nonmyeloablated hosts. One mechanism by which this may be achieved is through induction of donor-specific tolerance by the treated leukocyte population.
Example 15 Provision of GVL effect in the absence of GVHD by treated leukocytes in a murine model system Experiments were carried out to study the effects of S-59 + UVA treatment on the
GVL activity of donor lymphocytes in a MHC-mismatched B6/AKR murine model system. Donor splenocytes were passed through a fine mesh screen to obtain single-cell suspensions of unseparated splenocytes and were then treated with 0.01 μM S-59 and varying doses of UVA (0.5 min, 1 min, 2 min and 8 min). 1 x 107 treated donor splenocytes, along with 5 x 10 T-cell-depleted bone marrow cells (C57BL/6, H-2b, Thy
1.2+) were injected into AKR, H-2k, Thy 1.1+ hosts that had been subjected to 1100 R of total body irradiation. Each group of mice (6 animals per group) was challenged with 250 AKR-M2 leukemia cells 3 days after transplant. Transplanted animals were observed for clinical symptoms of GVHD, leukemia relapse and death. In addition, body weight of the transplanted animals was recorded every 3-4 days after transplant.
The results, summarized in Table 3 and Figures 14 and 15, demonstrate that appropriate ranges of UVA + S-59 dose, effective in preserving GVL activity while decreasing GVHD in MHC-mismatched transplants, can be obtained. For example, addition of untreated or mildly treated (0.5 min UVA + 0.01 μM S-59; exposure dose = 1.8 J-nM/cm2) lymphocytes to T-cell-depleted bone marrow resulted in mild to severe GVHD in transplanted recipients (as evidenced by the decreased body weight in these groups of animals; Figure 14). In contrast, lymphocytes treated with 1 min of UVA + 0.01 μM S-59 (exposure dose = 3.7 J-nM/cm ) were effective in preserving their GVL activity (3 of 3 survivors at 70 days post-leukemia challenge) with no signs of GVHD. See Table 3 and Figure 15. Body weight of animals treated with 1 min of UVA + 0.01 μM S-59 (Figure
14) also indicated lack of GVHD. The GVL activity of donor lymphocytes was abolished if cells were treated, at the same S-59 concentration, with higher UVA doses (2 and 8 min UVA, equivalent to exposure doses of 7.5 and 30 J-nM/cm2, respectively).. Under these conditions, 3/3 mice died within 20 days of transplant. See Figure 15
Table 3 GVL Activity in B6/AKR chimeras administered PCT leukocytes
Figure imgf000086_0001
Notes: - All groups were irradiated on day -1 and received MHC-mismatched bone marrow transplants, and treated splenocytes (if applicable), on day 0.
- Leukemia challenge, if done, was on day 3. - MST = median survival time, in days
- Range = day (after transplant) of death (X = alive)
From these results, it can be concluded that addition of leukocytes treated with appropriate doses of S-59 + UVA to T-cell-depleted bone marrow can prevent GVHD in a major MHC-mismatched murine model system. Furthermore, addition of appropriately treated leukocytes facilitates donor engraftment and leads to stable chimerism in a MHC- mismatched transplanted host. Finally, the GVL activity of treated leukocytes is preserved. Thus, treatment of leukocytes with S-59 + UVA is a novel method for modulating immunological activities of donor lymphocytes to aid allogeneic transplantation. Example 16 The effect of S-303 on human lymphocyte proliferation and T-cell function
Measurements were conducted on treated, allostimulated T-cells in a MLR assay. Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were isolated from a donor, ga ma- irradiated at a dose of 2,500 cGy to prevent autostimulation, and used as stimulator cells.
PBMCs isolated from a different donor were used as responder cells. Responder cells at a concentration of 2xl06 cells/ml were treated with 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 μM β-Alanine, N-(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester (S-303) at room temperature for approximately 15 min and washed twice with PBS containing 1% bovine serum albumin. S-303 -treated and untreated responder cells were co-cultured with the gamma-irradiated stimulator cells at a 1 :1 ratio.
Lymphocyte proliferation was measured by addition of 3H-thymidine to the co- culture six days after the start of co-culture, harvesting cells on day 7, and measuring incorporation of H cpm in the cells. Cytokine production was analyzed by sandwich ELISA of culture supernatants taken 24 and 48 hours after the start of co-culture.
Analysis of proliferative ability of S-303-treated cells (Figure 16) shows that 3H-thymidine incorporation in S-303 -treated, allostimulated responder cells was reduced in cells treated with 0.1 μM S-303, and completely blocked in cells treated with S-303 concentrations of 0.2 μM or greater. Thus, a dose-dependent inhibition of lymphocyte proliferation was observed in S-303-treated leukocytes.
Gamma interferon (IFN-γ) production was assessed as a measure of cytokine production by S-303-treated leukocytes. Figure 17 shows that IFN-γ secretion was unaffected in cells treated with 0.1 μM and 0.2 μM S-303, in which proliferation is severely reduced and completely inhibited, respectively (See Figure 16). Cells that had been treated with 0.3 μM S-303, in which lymphocyte proliferation is completely inhibited, (Figure 16) produced IFN-γ at approximately 28% of control levels (Figure 17).
In summary, proliferation of allostimulated human lymphocytes, measured in a MLR, was inhibited in a dose-dependent fashion by prior treatment with S-303. Furthermore, under conditions where proliferation is completely inhibited (e.g., treatment of responder cells with 0.2 μM S-303), synthesis of IFN-γ remained unaffected. Thus,
S-303 treatment conditions can be obtained that allow one to generate lymphocytes that are incapable of proliferation upon stimulation, yet retain immunological activity. While the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications may be practiced without departing from the spirit of the invention. Therefore the foregoing descriptions and examples should not be construed as limiting the scope of the invention.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. An isolated population of cells to be used for introduction into an allogeneic recipient, the cell population comprising a population of leukocytes, wherein a portion of the leukocyte population is non-proliferating such that induction of graft- versus- ost disease (GVHD) in the recipient is inhibited, and wherein a portion of the leukocyte population retains immunological activity.
2. The cell population of claim 1, wherein the leukocyte population comprises T cells, NK cells and antigen-presenting cells.
3. The cell population of claim 1 wherein, upon appropriate stimulation, a portion of the leukocyte population produces cytokines.
4. The cell population of claim 3 wherein the cytokines are selected from the group consisting of IL-1 IL-2, IL-4, IFN-╬│, IL-10 and GM-CSF.
5. The cell population of claim 1 wherein a portion of the leukocyte population expresses a surface marker selected from the group consisting of CD2, CD28, CTLA4, CD40 ligand (gp39), CD18, CD25, CD69 (lymphocyte activation marker) and CD16/CD56, MHC Class I and Class II, CD8, CD4, CD3/TcR (T cell receptor), CD54 (ICAM -1), LFA-1 and VLA-4.
6. The cell population of claim 1, wherein greater than 90% of the leukocytes in the population are non-proliferating.
7. The cell population of claim 1 , wherein the leukocytes have been stimulated by exposure to an antigen or a mitogen.
8. The cell population of claim 1 wherein the leukocytes are effective in promoting destruction of a diseased cell.
9. The cell population of claim 1 wherein the leukocytes are effective in promoting destruction of an infected cell.
10. The cell population of claim 1 wherein the leukocytes facilitate engraftment by a second population of cells.
11. The cell population of claim 10, wherein the second population of cells is selected from the group consisting of hematopoietic cells, myeloid cells, leukocytes, bone marrow cells, islet cells, hepatic cells, neuronal cells, myocardial cells, mesenchymal cells and endothelial cells.
12. The cell population of claim 10, wherein the second population of cells is an organ.
13. The population of claim 1 wherein the population of leukocytes comprises a first subpopulation of lymphocytes.
14. The population of claim 13 wherein the first subpopulation of lymphocytes comprises a second subpopulation of T-lymphocytes.
15. The population of claim 14 wherein the second subpopulation is obtained based on surface marker expression.
16. The population of claim 15 wherein the surface marker is selected from the group consisting of CD8, CD4, CD16 and CD56.
17. The population of claim 1 wherein the population of leukocytes is obtained from whole blood by a procedure selected from the group consisting of leukophoresis and red cell removal.
18. A method for donor leukocyte infusion, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject subsequent to a bone marrow transplant.
19. A method for enhancing engraftment of a population of transplanted cells, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject prior to the time of transplant.
20. A method for enhancing engraftment of a population of transplanted cells, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject at the time of transplant.
21. A method for enhancing engraftment of a population of transplanted cells, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject subsequent to the time of transplant.
22. The method according to claim 20, wherein the population of transplanted cells comprises hematopoietic stem cells.
23. The method according to claim 21, wherein the population of transplanted cells comprises hematopoietic stem cells.
24. A method for immune reconstitution, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject.
25. A method for adoptive immunotherapy, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject.
26. A method for treatment of mixed chimerism, wherein the method comprises introducing a cell population according to claim 1 into a mammalian subject.
27. A method for preparing a cell population according to claim 1 , wherein the method comprises:
(a) forming an in vitro reaction mixture comprising a population of leukocytes and a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid; and (b) incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that yield a population of cells comprising a population of leukocytes; wherein a portion of the leukocyte population is non-proliferating such that induction of graft- versus-host disease (GVHD) in the recipient is inhibited, and wherein a portion of the leukocyte population retains immunological activity.
28. The method according to claim 27 wherein immunological activity includes destruction of a diseased cell, an infected cell or a pathogen.
29. The method according to claim 27 wherein the compound is present in an amount such that the compound forms between about 1 to about 104 adducts per 108 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes.
30. The method according to claim 27, wherein the compound is present in an amount such that the compound forms between about 5 to about 103 adducts per 108 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes.
31. The method according to claim 27 wherein unreacted compound is removed.
32. The method according to claim 31 wherein unreacted compound is removed by addition of a quencher to the reaction mixture.
33. A population of cells prepared according to the method of claim 27.
34. A population of cells whose properties are equivalent to those of the population according to claim 33.
35. A population of cells whose properties are equivalent to those of the population according to claim 1.
36. The method according to claim 27, wherein proliferation is inhibited in at least 90% of T-cells within the treated leukocyte population.
37. The method according to claim 27 wherein the compound comprises a nucleic acid binding moiety capable of binding non-covalently with a nucleic acid.
38. The method according to claim 27, wherein the compound comprises:
(a) a nucleic acid binding moiety;
(b) an effector moiety capable of forming a covalent bond with nucleic acid; and
(c) a frangible linker covalently linking the nucleic acid binding moiety and the effector moiety.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein the nucleic acid binding moiety is an aromatic intercalator and the effector moiety is a mustard.
40. The method according to claim 39, wherein the compound is ╬▓-alanine, N-
(acridin-9-yl), 2-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]ethyl ester (S-303) having the formula:.
Figure imgf000092_0001
and salts thereof.
41. The method of claim 27, wherein the compound is also a replication inhibitor.
42. The method of claim 27, wherein the compound is also a topoisomerase inhibitor.
43. The method of claim 42 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of camptothecin and daunomycin.
44. The method of claim 27, wherein said compound comprises a photoactivatable moiety which, upon electromagnetic stimulation, forms a covalent bond with a nucleic acid.
45. The method of claim 44, wherein the method further comprises exposing the reaction mixture to light to photoactivate said photoactivatable moiety, thereby resulting in formation of a covalent bond between the photoactivatable moiety and leukocyte genomic
DNA.
46. The method of claim 45, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of furocoumarins, actinomycins, anthracyclinones, anthramycins, benzodipyrones, fluorenes, fluorenones, monostral fats blue, norphillin A, organic dyes; phenanthridines, phenazathionium salts, phenazines, phenothiazines, phenylazides, quinolines, thiaxanthenones, acridines and ellipticenes.
47. The method of claim 46, wherein the furocoumarin is a psoralen.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein the psoralen is selected from the group consisting of PAP, 8-methoxy psoralen (8-MOP), 4'-aminomethyl 4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen (AMT), 5-methoxy psoralen, and trioxalen 4, 5' 8-trimethylpsoralen.
49. The method of claim 47, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm.
50. The method of claim 49, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 320 to 400 nm.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light at a dosage of between 10"3 to 100 J/cm2.
52. The method of claim 51 , wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of 1 second to 60 minutes.
53. The method of claim 52, wherein the psoralen is present at a concentration in the range of 10"4 to 150 ╬╝M.
54. The method of claim 53, wherein said psoralen is 4'-(4-amino-2-oxa) butyl-4,5',8-trimethylpsoralen (S-59) having the formula:
Figure imgf000094_0001
and salts thereof.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein the S-59 is at a concentration in the range of 10 ,┬░-3 to 150 ╬╝M.
56. The method of claim 55, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 200 to 450 nm.
57. The method of claim 56, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light having a wavelength in the range of 320 to 400 nm.
58. The method of claim 57, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light at a dosage of between 10" to 100 J/cm .
59. The method of claim 58, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to ultraviolet light at a dosage of 3 J/cm .
60. The method of claim 58, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of between 1 second to 60 minutes.
61. The method of claim 60, wherein the reaction mixture is exposed to the ultraviolet light for a period of approximately 1 minute.
62. The method of claim 61 , wherein the population of leukocytes is at a cell density of 10 to 109 cells per mL.
63. The method of claim 62, wherein the population of leukocytes is at a cell density of 2 x 106 cells per mL.
64. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 38.
65. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 40.
66. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 41.
67. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 46.
68. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 54.
69. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 59.
70. A population of cells produced according to the method of claim 63.
71. A method for promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, comprising mixing the leukocyte population of claim 1 with a population of allogeneic cells containing the diseased cell or pathogen.
72. A method for promoting destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen, comprising mixing the leukocyte population of claim 70 with a population of allogeneic cells containing the diseased cell or pathogen.
73. The method of claim 72, wherein the diseased cell is a cancerous cell.
74. The method of claim 73, wherein the cancerous cell is selected from the group consisting of Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia (CML) cell, Chronic myelomonocytic Leukemia (CmML) cell, Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL) cell,
Acute Myelogenous Leukemia (AML) cell, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia (ALL) cell, multiple myeloma (MM) cell, Hodgkin's lymphoma cell and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma cell.
75. The method of claim 74, wherein the cancerous cell is a Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia cell.
76. The method of claim 74, wherein the cancerous cell is a multiple myeloma cell.
77. The method of claim 73, wherein the cancerous cell is selected from the group consisting of breast cancerous cell, lung cancerous cell, ovarian cancerous cell, testicular cancerous cell, prostate cancerous cell, colon cancerous cell, melanoma cell, renal carcinoma cell, neuroblastoma cell, head tumor cell and neck tumor cell.
78. The method of claim 71 , wherein the diseased cell is an infected cell.
79. The method of claim 78, wherein the infected cell is infected with a virus.
80. The method of claim 79, wherein the virus is selected from the group consisting of cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein Barr virus (EBV), Adenovirus (Ad) and Kaposi's Sarcoma associated Herpes virus.
81. The method of claim 71 , wherein the leukocyte population is mixed with the population of allogeneic cells of a mammalian host in vivo by donor leukocyte infusion into said host.
82. The method of claim 81 , wherein the mammalian host is suffering from relapse from leukemia or multiple myeloma post bone marrow transplantation.
83. The method of claim 71 , wherein the leukocyte population has been stimulated to expand the number of cytotoxic T cells specific to an antigen of the diseased cell or pathogen.
84. The method of claim 83, wherein the stimulation is performed in vivo prior to isolation of the leukocyte population from the donor.
85. The method of claim 84, wherein the stimulation is performed by vaccination of the leukocyte donor with the antigen.
86. The method of claim 85, wherein the diseased cell is a CML cell and the leukocyte donor is vaccinated with a bcr-abl antigen of the CML cell.
87. The method of claim 85, wherein the diseased cell is a multiple myeloma cell and the leukocyte donor is vaccinated with the idiotype antigen of the myeloma cell.
88. The method of claim 83, wherein the stimulation is performed ex vivo.
89. The method of claim 83, wherein stimulation results from contact between the leukocyte population and a diseased cell.
90. The method of claim 83, wherein stimulation results from contact between the leukocyte population and an antigen-presenting cell, wherein the antigen-presenting cell has been exposed to the diseased cell.
91. The method of claim 83, wherein stimulation results from contact between the leukocyte population and an antigen-presenting cell, wherein the antigen-presenting cell has been exposed to an antigen of the diseased cell.
92. A method for preparing a cell population according to claim 1 , wherein the method comprises:
(a) forming an in vitro reaction mixture comprising a population of leukocytes and a replication-inhibitory compound; and (b) incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that yield a population of cells comprising a population of leukocytes wherein a portion of the leukocyte population is non-proliferating such that induction of graft- versus- ost disease (GVHD) in the recipient is inhibited, and wherein a portion of the leukocyte population retains immunological activity.
93. The method of claim 92, wherein the compound is a topoisomerase inhibitor.
94. The method of claim 93 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of camptothecin and daunomycin.
95. A method for preparing a treated leukocyte population wherein the leukocyte population as a whole is non-proliferating and incapable of eliciting graft- versus-host disease (GVHD) in an allogeneic host, comprising the steps of: i) providing a sample of a purified population of leukocytes; and ii) combining the sample of leukocytes with a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid, in an amount such that the compound forms about 1 to 104 adducts per 108 base pairs of genomic DNA of the leukocytes, thereby inhibiting proliferation but maintaining the effectiveness of the leukocyte population to promote destruction of a diseased cell or a pathogen.
96. A method for preparing stimulator cells for a mixed lymphocyte reaction wherein a population of cells comprising a population of leukocytes is treated according to the method of claim 27 and the treated cell population is used as stimulator cells.
97. A method for determining whether proliferation is required for a cell function comprising the steps of:
(a) forming an in vitro reaction mixture comprising a population of cells and a compound capable of forming a covalent bond with a nucleic acid; (b) incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that yield a population of cells that are incapable of DNA synthesis but capable of RNA and protein biosynthesis; and observing the cell population to determine whether the cell function is carried out.
98. The method of claim 97 wherein the cell function is differentiation.
PCT/US1998/015067 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof WO1999003976A2 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU85776/98A AU748074B2 (en) 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof
CA002296366A CA2296366A1 (en) 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof
JP2000503182A JP2003520563A (en) 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Methods for treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of using the same
EP98936943A EP1005531A2 (en) 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US5359997P 1997-07-21 1997-07-21
US60/053,599 1997-07-21
US11970798A 1998-07-20 1998-07-20
US09/119,707 1998-07-20

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999003976A2 true WO1999003976A2 (en) 1999-01-28
WO1999003976A3 WO1999003976A3 (en) 1999-05-27

Family

ID=26732039

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1998/015067 WO1999003976A2 (en) 1997-07-21 1998-07-21 Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1005531A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2003520563A (en)
CN (1) CN1270630A (en)
AU (1) AU748074B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2296366A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999003976A2 (en)

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002036748A2 (en) * 2000-11-03 2002-05-10 Nexell Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for depleting and isolating alloreactive and antigen-reactive t cells from hematopoietic donor cells
JP2003510372A (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-03-18 ユニヴェルスィテ・ドゥ・モントリオール Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and therapy
US7691393B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-04-06 Anza Therapeutics, Inc. Listeria attenuated for entry into non-phagocytic cells, vaccines comprising the Listeria, and methods of use thereof
US7695725B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-04-13 Aduro Biotech Modified free-living microbes, vaccine compositions and methods of use thereof
US7833775B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-11-16 Aduro Biotech Modified free-living microbes, vaccine compositions and methods of use thereof
US8206701B2 (en) * 2001-03-16 2012-06-26 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Semi-allogenic anti-tumour vaccine with HLA haplo-identical antigen-presenting cells
US8409564B2 (en) 1999-10-05 2013-04-02 Universite De Montreal Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and treatment
WO2013064672A3 (en) * 2011-11-03 2013-07-04 Ulf Niemeyer Oxazaphosphorines dosed one time for treating diseases
US20130252227A1 (en) * 2012-03-20 2013-09-26 Fenwal, Inc. Apparatus and Method for Providing Cryopreserved ECP-Treated Mononuclear Cells
US8697854B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2014-04-15 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt Gmbh High affinity T cell receptor and use thereof
WO2017031341A1 (en) 2015-08-19 2017-02-23 Children's Research Institute, Children's National Medical Center Compositions and methods for treating graft versus host disease
EP3215139A4 (en) * 2014-11-03 2018-07-18 Cerus Corporation Compositions and methods for improved car-t cell therapies
US20190224494A1 (en) * 2012-03-20 2019-07-25 Fenwal, Inc. Apparatus and method for batch photoactivation of mononuclear cells with cryopreservation
US10799533B2 (en) 2015-10-23 2020-10-13 Cerus Corporation Plasma compositions and methods of use thereof
CN112334143A (en) * 2018-06-21 2021-02-05 麦丁制药公司 Supernatants from co-cultures of macrophages and irradiated leukocytes for controlling tumor progression or restoring anti-tumor immunity
US11096963B2 (en) 2015-06-26 2021-08-24 Cerus Corporation Cryoprecipitate compositions and methods of preparation thereof
US11235090B2 (en) 2017-03-03 2022-02-01 Cerus Corporation Kits and methods for preparing pathogen-inactivated platelet compositions
US11554185B2 (en) 2017-12-29 2023-01-17 Cerus Corporation Systems and methods for treating biological fluids
US11679193B2 (en) 2017-12-20 2023-06-20 Fenwal, Inc. System and method of collecting and infusing an apoptotic white blood cell component and a transplant component
US11883544B2 (en) 2019-06-28 2024-01-30 Cerus Corporation System and methods for implementing a biological fluid treatment device

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3058957A1 (en) * 2015-02-19 2016-08-24 Kiadis Pharma Intellectual Property BV Improved photodynamic process and product obtained therefrom
CN104788373A (en) * 2015-05-06 2015-07-22 武汉大学 Method for synthesizing compound S-303 hydrochloride
CN109337758A (en) * 2018-11-30 2019-02-15 广西科技大学 A kind of grease aflatoxin capture removing method for strengthening DNA and aflatoxin packing interaction based on ultraviolet light

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0284409A2 (en) * 1987-03-27 1988-09-28 THERAKOS, Inc. Active specific immune suppression
WO1996039820A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 1996-12-19 Cerus Corporation Methods of inactivating leukocytes and inhibiting cytokine production in blood products
US5651993A (en) * 1992-11-18 1997-07-29 Yale University Specific immune system modulation

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0284409A2 (en) * 1987-03-27 1988-09-28 THERAKOS, Inc. Active specific immune suppression
US5651993A (en) * 1992-11-18 1997-07-29 Yale University Specific immune system modulation
WO1996039820A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 1996-12-19 Cerus Corporation Methods of inactivating leukocytes and inhibiting cytokine production in blood products

Non-Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
GAUS H. ET AL.: "Superantigen-induced anergy of Vbeta8sup + CD4sup + T cells induces functional but non-proliferative T cells in vivo" IMMUNOLOGY, vol. 83, no. 3, 1994, pages 333-340, XP002094963 gb *
GRASS J. ET AL.: "Inactivation of T-cells with psoralens and UVA in human platelet concentrates" BLOOD, vol. 86, no. 10 suppl.1, - 1995 page 542a XP002094969 *
GRASS J. ET AL.: "Prevention of transfusion-associated graft versus host disease (TA-GVHD) by photochemical treatment" BLOOD, vol. 88, no. 10 Suppl.1, 1996, page 627a XP002094968 *
GRASS J.A. ET AL.: "Inactivation of leucocytes in platelet concentrates by photochemical treatment with psoralen plus UVA" BLOOD, vol. 91, no. 6, 1998, pages 2180-2188, XP002094967 *
HALSTENSEN T., BRANDTZAEG P.: "Activated T lymphocytes in the celiac lesion: Non proliferative activation (CD25) of CD24 positive apha/beta cells in the lamina propria but proliferation (Ki-67) of alpha/beta and gamma/delta cells in the epithelium " EUROPEAN JOURNAL OF IMMUNOLOGY, vol. 23, no. 2, 1993, pages 505-510, XP002094962 *
KOZENITZKY L. ET AL.: "Immunomodulatory effects of AS101 on interleukin-2 production and T-lymphocyte function of lymphocytes treated with psoralens and ultraviolet A" PHOTODERMATOLOGY, PHOTOIMMUNOLOGY & PHOTOMEDICINE, vol. 9, no. 1, 1992, pages 24-28, XP002094960 *
MONTERO R. ET AL.: "AS-101: a modulator of in vitro T-cel proliferation" ANTI-CANCER DRUGS, vol. 4, no. 3, 1993, pages 351-354, XP002094966 *
ULLRICH S.E.: "Photoinactivation of t-cell function with psoralen and uvA radiation suppresses the induction of experimental murine graf-versus-host disease accross Major Histocompatibility barriers" JOURNAL OF INVESTIGATIVE DERMATOLOGY, vol. 96, no. 3, 1991, pages 303-308, XP002094961 *
WINKELSTEIN A.: "Murine B-lymphocyte colony formation: the effects of cyclophosphamide and azathiopirine" IMMUNOLOGY, vol. 46, - 1982 pages 827-832, XP002094965 gb *

Cited By (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4859319B2 (en) * 1999-10-05 2012-01-25 ユニヴェルスィテ・ドゥ・モントリオール Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and therapy
JP2003510372A (en) * 1999-10-05 2003-03-18 ユニヴェルスィテ・ドゥ・モントリオール Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and therapy
US8802082B2 (en) 1999-10-05 2014-08-12 Universite De Montreal Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and treatment
US8409564B2 (en) 1999-10-05 2013-04-02 Universite De Montreal Rhodamine derivatives for photodynamic diagnosis and treatment
WO2002036748A3 (en) * 2000-11-03 2003-10-02 Nexell Therapeutics Inc Methods for depleting and isolating alloreactive and antigen-reactive t cells from hematopoietic donor cells
WO2002036748A2 (en) * 2000-11-03 2002-05-10 Nexell Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for depleting and isolating alloreactive and antigen-reactive t cells from hematopoietic donor cells
US9238063B2 (en) 2001-03-16 2016-01-19 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundlheit und Umwelt (GmbH) Semi-allogenic anti-tumour vaccine with HLA haplo-identical antigen-presenting cells
US8206701B2 (en) * 2001-03-16 2012-06-26 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Semi-allogenic anti-tumour vaccine with HLA haplo-identical antigen-presenting cells
US9597384B2 (en) 2001-03-16 2017-03-21 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Semi-allogenic anti-tumour vaccine with HLA haplo-identical antigen-presenting cells
US7833775B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-11-16 Aduro Biotech Modified free-living microbes, vaccine compositions and methods of use thereof
US7695725B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-04-13 Aduro Biotech Modified free-living microbes, vaccine compositions and methods of use thereof
US7691393B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2010-04-06 Anza Therapeutics, Inc. Listeria attenuated for entry into non-phagocytic cells, vaccines comprising the Listeria, and methods of use thereof
US7927606B2 (en) 2003-02-06 2011-04-19 Aduro Biotech Modified free-living microbes, vaccine compositions and methods of use thereof
US9862755B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2018-01-09 Max-Delbrueck-Centrum Fuer Molekulare Medizin High affinity T cell receptor and use thereof
US10626159B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2020-04-21 Max-Delbrueck-Centrum Fuer Molekulare Medizin High affinity T cell receptor and use thereof
US8697854B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2014-04-15 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt Gmbh High affinity T cell receptor and use thereof
WO2013064672A3 (en) * 2011-11-03 2013-07-04 Ulf Niemeyer Oxazaphosphorines dosed one time for treating diseases
US20190224494A1 (en) * 2012-03-20 2019-07-25 Fenwal, Inc. Apparatus and method for batch photoactivation of mononuclear cells with cryopreservation
US20130252227A1 (en) * 2012-03-20 2013-09-26 Fenwal, Inc. Apparatus and Method for Providing Cryopreserved ECP-Treated Mononuclear Cells
EP2641623B1 (en) * 2012-03-20 2020-09-30 Fenwal, Inc. Apparatus and methods for providing cryopreserved ecp-treated mononuclear cells
EP3215139A4 (en) * 2014-11-03 2018-07-18 Cerus Corporation Compositions and methods for improved car-t cell therapies
US10688166B2 (en) 2014-11-03 2020-06-23 Cerus Corporation Compositions and methods for improved car-T cell therapies
US11096963B2 (en) 2015-06-26 2021-08-24 Cerus Corporation Cryoprecipitate compositions and methods of preparation thereof
US10898522B2 (en) 2015-08-19 2021-01-26 Children's Research Institute, Children's National Medical Center Compositions and methods for treating graft versus host disease
WO2017031341A1 (en) 2015-08-19 2017-02-23 Children's Research Institute, Children's National Medical Center Compositions and methods for treating graft versus host disease
US10799533B2 (en) 2015-10-23 2020-10-13 Cerus Corporation Plasma compositions and methods of use thereof
US11235090B2 (en) 2017-03-03 2022-02-01 Cerus Corporation Kits and methods for preparing pathogen-inactivated platelet compositions
US11679193B2 (en) 2017-12-20 2023-06-20 Fenwal, Inc. System and method of collecting and infusing an apoptotic white blood cell component and a transplant component
US11554185B2 (en) 2017-12-29 2023-01-17 Cerus Corporation Systems and methods for treating biological fluids
CN112334143A (en) * 2018-06-21 2021-02-05 麦丁制药公司 Supernatants from co-cultures of macrophages and irradiated leukocytes for controlling tumor progression or restoring anti-tumor immunity
US11883544B2 (en) 2019-06-28 2024-01-30 Cerus Corporation System and methods for implementing a biological fluid treatment device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU8577698A (en) 1999-02-10
AU748074B2 (en) 2002-05-30
CN1270630A (en) 2000-10-18
WO1999003976A3 (en) 1999-05-27
CA2296366A1 (en) 1999-01-28
JP2003520563A (en) 2003-07-08
EP1005531A2 (en) 2000-06-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU748074B2 (en) Method of treating leukocytes, leukocyte compositions and methods of use thereof
JP5707284B2 (en) Administration of partially matured dendritic cells in vitro for the treatment of tumors
KR20200068762A (en) Device and Method for obtaining immuno-stimulatory antigen-presenting cells
CN110846281B (en) Anti-tumor vaccine based on exosomes
US7892535B2 (en) Preventing transfusion related complications in a recipient of a blood transfusion
KR20130033354A (en) Method for producing nk cell enhancement-type blood product
US20120082687A1 (en) Use of cell adhesion inhibitor for the mobilization of antigen presenting cells and immune cells in a cell mixture (AIM) from the peripheral blood and methods of use
JP2006510667A5 (en)
US10385315B2 (en) Cells expressing Th1 characteristics and cytolytic properties
US20030149011A1 (en) Methods and reagents for extracorporeal immunomodulatory therapy
Andreu et al. The role of UV radiation in the prevention of human leukocyte antigen alloimmunization
JP2002501726A (en) Improved extracorporeal methods for enhancing antigen presentation and immune response
JP2004505058A (en) Drugs for immunotherapy of malignant tumors
KR20030084826A (en) Dendritic cell pulsing allogeneic tumor-associated antigen, method for the preparation thereof and vaccine composition containing same for treating cancer
Phillips et al. Human bone marrow transplantation
JPWO2008143014A1 (en) Cancer treatment
CA2529244C (en) Rapamycin resistant t cells and therapeutic uses thereof
Perez et al. DNA associated with the cell membrane is involved in the inhibition of the skin rejection response induced by infusions of photodamaged alloreactive cells that mediate rejection of skin allograft
ES2927913B2 (en) Composition comprising a combination of the furanocoumarins psoralen and angelicin and its use in therapy
KR100954315B1 (en) Autologous Dendritic Cell Mediated by Photodynamic Therapy Having the Ability to Suppress the Growth of Tumor
Guinan et al. Preservation of immune repertoire by selective depletion of haploidentical grafts
Obochi Prevention of skin allograft rejection by photodynamic therapy (PDT) using benzoporphyrin derivative monoacid ring A (BPD) verteporfin
WO2023006982A1 (en) Methods for selectively reducing immunogenicity in a transplant
McIver THE DEVELOPMENT OF SELECTIVE PHOTOSENSITIZERS TO TARGET PATHOGENIC T CELLS AND PREVENT GRAFT-VERSUS-HOST DISEASE
Dai TH9402 mediated photodynamic therapy: implications for ex vivo purging and tumor vaccination

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 98809097.X

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2296366

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2296366

Country of ref document: CA

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 85776/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1998936943

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1998936943

Country of ref document: EP

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 85776/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1998936943

Country of ref document: EP